Pioneer | RCS-LX60D | User's Manual | Pioneer RCS-LX60D User's Manual

Pioneer RCS-LX60D User's Manual
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 1 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
RCS-LX60D
SX-LX60D
SSP-LX60D
DVR-LX60D
Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer
Speaker System
HDD/DVD Recorder
®
®
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at
http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu)
Operating Instructions
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 2 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly.
After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference.
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
WARNING
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filed
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En
or moisture.
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230V
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
or 120V) written on the rear panel.
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
(73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives
(89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and
D3-4-2-1-9a_En
93/68/EEC).
POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
K041_En
warranty period.
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this
product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers
or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
The following caution label appears on your unit.
Location: inside of the HDD/DVD Recorder
D3-4-2-1-8_B_En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 3 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
on vacation).
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
VENTILATION CAUTION (Receiver subwoofer)
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 5 cm at top, 5 cm at rear, and 5
cm at each side).
VENTILATION CAUTION (HDD/DVD Recorder)
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
10 cm
WARNING
10 cm
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
equipment.
Receiver subwoofer
10 cm
HDD/DVD Recorder
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
Private households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential
negative effects on the environment and human health.
K058_En
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug
must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of
safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 4 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Section One
Contents
Section One
Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
07 Listening to the radio
01 Speaker Setup Guide
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Memorizing stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Displaying RDS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Front surround setup (recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wall mounting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Before mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . 9
02 Connecting up
Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using this system for TV audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
03 Controls and displays
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Inserting a CA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 21
04 Before you start
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Watching a DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Listening to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Watching a title recorded on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 23
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
05 Getting started
System demo setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal
surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
06 Listening to your system
Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Enhancing dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . . 28
4
En
08 Surround sound settings
Using the Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone. . . . 32
09 Other connections
Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting an analog audio component . . . . . . . . 33
Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . . 34
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays . . . . . . . . . 35
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer
plasma display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10 Additional information
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
DTS CD setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Section Two
Operating instructions for HDD/DVD
Recorder (DVR-LX60D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 5 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Section One
What’s in the box
Please confirm that the following items are all supplied.
Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX60D) box:
• Remote control (page 18)
HDD/DVD recorder (DVR-LX60D) box:
• AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) x2
(page 21)
• Remote control
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) (page 14)
• Display unit (page 15)
• G-LINK™ cable (page 51)
• Power cord (page 12)
• RF antenna cable x 2 (page 14)
• AM loop antenna (page 10)
• Power cord (page 14)
• FM wire antenna (page 10)
• Operating instructions
• Control cable (page 10)
• Warranty card
• Display cable (page 10)
• Coaxial cable (page 10)
Speakers (SSP-LX60D) box:
• Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 24)
• Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x2) (page 12)
• Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 7)
• Speaker cables x5 (page 12)
• Spacers x2 (page 11)
• Non-skid pads (small) x24 (page 7)
• These operating instructions
• Brackets x2 (page 7)
• Warranty card
• Spiral wrap x2 (page 13)
• Screws x8 (page 7)
5
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 6 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
01
Speaker Setup Guide
Chapter 1
Speaker Setup Guide
Safety precautions when setting up
When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on
their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a
stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing
the speakers.
If the speakers are to be used in a stacked configuration,
always use the provided brackets to secure them
together (page 7, 8).
Home theater sound setup
Bass
Front left
Center
Front right
Surround right
Surround left
Most 5.1 channel home theater systems are designed so
that speakers are placed to surround the listener’s
position as shown in the illustration. Such designs,
however, produce the undesirable effect of forcing the
center speaker to be mounted above or below the
television monitor, and require room for the surround
speakers.
Front surround setup (recommended)
This recommended method places the surround
speakers in front, to simplify the issue of speaker
placement in the room. The center speakers can be
placed in independently in the center if desired.
Surround
left
Bass
Front left
Surround
right
Center
Center
Front
left
Front
right
Front right
Center
Receiver
subwoofer
Surround left
Surround right
The present system, however, features Pioneer’s
proprietary New Front Surround technology and Dual
Center Speakers, using only two speaker positions (to
right and left of television as shown in the illustration) in
order to provide full home theater sound while greatly
simplifying the issue of speaker placement.
6
En
Listening position
*When center speakers are placed in the center.
Surround
left
Surround
right
Front
left
Front
right
Center
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 7 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Speaker Setup Guide
01
1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of
each of the front, center and surround speakers. The
four large non-skid pads are for the receiver
subwoofer (as shown).
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the
base (flat surface) of each speaker.
As shown in the illustration, stack the speakers from the
bottom up in the order front speaker, center speaker,
surround speaker. Align the bracket with the respective
upper screw hole on the back of the front speaker, the
two screw holes on the center speaker, and the bottom
screw hole on the surround speaker, and fasten the
screws securely.
Bracket
Surround speaker
Non-skid pads
(small) x 24
Front, Center and Surround speakers
Center speaker
Screw
Front speaker
When placing the center speakers independently, stack
the front speaker on the bottom and the surround
speaker on top, then align the 1st and 3rd screw holes
from the top of the bracket with the upper screw holes on
the back of the speakers, and fasten the two securely.
Non-skid pads
(large) x 4
Receiver subwoofer
2 Stack the speakers and fix with the brackets.
Each speaker is provided with a color-coded indicator on
the model label on the rear side to assist identification.
Refer to the color indicators and install the speakers
correctly.
Left
Model label
Color indicator
Right
Blue
Surround speaker
Gray
Green
Center speaker
Green
White
Front speaker
Red
Bracket
Surround speaker
Front speaker
Screw
Caution
• Do not attempt to carry the speakers when they are
connected with the bracket. Doing so may cause
damage to the bracket or worsen damage to the
bracket and speakers in the event they are dropped.
3 Connect the speaker system.
Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly.
After connecting everything, place the speakers as
shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound.
After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup
(page 24) to complete your surround sound setup.
7
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 8 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
01
Speaker Setup Guide
Standard surround setup
This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker
setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound.
The center speakers can be installed independently in
the center if desired.
2 (When mounting center speakers to right and
left) Stack the speakers and fix with the bracket.
Each speaker is provided with a color-coded indicator on
the model label on the rear side to assist identification.
Refer to the color indicators and install the speakers
correctly.
Left
Model label
Center
Center
Front
left
Front
right
Right
Green
Center speaker
Green
White
Front speaker
Red
Color indicator
Receiver
subwoofer
Listening position
As shown in the illustration, stack the speakers with the
front speaker on the bottom and center speaker on top,
then align the 1st and 3rd screw holes from the top of the
bracket with the upper screw holes on the back of the
speakers, and fasten the two securely.
Bracket
Surround left
Surround right
Center speaker
*When center speakers are placed in the center.
Front
left
Front
right
Front speaker
Center
1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of
each of the front, center and surround speakers. The
four large non-skid pads are for the receiver
subwoofer (as shown).
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the
base (flat surface) of each speaker.
Non-skid pads
(small) x 24
Front, Center and Surround speakers
Receiver subwoofer
En
Caution
• Do not attempt to carry the speakers when they are
connected with the bracket. Doing so may cause
damage to the bracket or worsen damage to the
bracket and speakers in the event they are dropped.
3 Connect the speaker system.
Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly.
After connecting everything, place the speakers as
shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound.
After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup
(page 24) to complete your surround sound setup.
Non-skid pads
(large) x 4
8
Screw
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 9 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Speaker Setup Guide
Wall mounting the speakers
The front, center and surround speakers have a
mounting hole which can be used to mount the speaker
on the wall.
Before mounting
• Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that
its weight could cause the screws to work loose, or
the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the
speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to
mount the speakers on is strong enough to support
them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls.
• Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws
suitable for the wall material and support the weight
of the speaker.
Caution
• If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the
wall, consult a professional for advice.
• Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or
damage that result from improper installation.
5 mm
10 mm
01
Additional notes on speaker placement
• Install the main front left and right speakers at an
equal distance from the TV.
• When using the Front surround setup, separate the
left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum
effect.
• When using the Standard surround setup, install the
surround speakers slightly above ear level for
optimum effect.
Precautions:
• When installing the center speaker on top of the TV,
be sure to secure it with tape or some other suitable
means. Otherwise, the speaker may fall from the TV
due to external shocks such as earthquakes,
endangering those nearby or damaging the speaker.
• The front (x2), center (x2) and surround (x2) speakers
supplied with this system are magnetically shielded.
However, depending on the installation location,
color distortion may occur if the speaker is installed
extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this
happens, turn the power switch of the television set
OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the
problem persists, place the speaker system away
from the television set.
• The receiver subwoofer is not magnetically shielded
and so should not be placed near a TV or monitor.
Magnetic storage media (such as floppy discs and
tape or video cassettes) should also not be kept close
to the receiver subwoofer.
• Do not attach the receiver subwoofer to the wall or
ceiling. They may fall off and cause injury.
• For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare
speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals.
5 mm to 7 mm
• Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other
amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire.
• Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
9
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 10 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
02
Connecting up
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Basic connections
Important
• When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power
cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.
Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX60D)
FM antenna
AM loop antenna
3
4
HDD/DVD Recorder (DVR-LX60D)
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
AC IN
INPUT 3
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
ANTENNA
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
OUT
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL IN
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND L
AM LOOP ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
DVD/DVR1 DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL
ANALOG
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
IN
AV 1 (RGB) ñ TV
5V
CONTROL
R
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
COAXIAL
30 mA
1
b Coaxial cable
Display unit
L
USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
HDMI OUT
OUTPUT
OUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
a Control cable
AC IN
Display cable
Note
• When using the display unit in a wall-mounted
location, take full precautions to prevent the unit
from accidentally falling.
• Screws and other fixtures for use in wall mounting
are not included.
10
En
2
WARNING
• Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents
resulting from faulty assembly or installation,
insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting
fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural
disasters.
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 11 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Connecting up
1 Connect the HDD/DVD recorder to the receiver
subwoofer.
a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT jack
on the rear of the receiver subwoofer.
02
3
Assemble the AM loop antenna.
a
b
c
Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN
jack on the rear of the HDD/DVD recorder.
b. Plug the coaxial cable into the DIGITAL AUDIO
INPUT (DVD/DVR 1) jack on the rear of the receiver
subwoofer.
a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow.
b. Clip the loop onto the stand.
Plug the other end of the cable into the DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack on the rear of the HDD/
DVD recorder.
Note that unless the control cable is connected, you
can’t use the remote control with the HDD/DVD recorder.
2 Fasten the spacers to the display unit and connect.
If the display unit is difficult to view, the spacers can be
attached to allow changing of the viewing angle. Peel off
the protective paper from the spacers and press the
spacers onto the depressions on the bottom of the display
unit.
c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform
step b after first securing the stand with screws.
It is recommended that you determine the reception
strength before securing the stand with the screws.
4
Connect the AM and FM antennas 1.
a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM
antenna terminal2.
For each terminal, press down on the tab to open;
insert the wire, then release to secure.
1
2
b. Push the FM antenna3 plug onto the center pin of the
FM antenna socket.
Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the
connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the
other end of the display cable into SYSTEM CONNECTOR
jack on the receiver subwoofer.
Note
1 • Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and HDD/DVD recorder.
• If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 29 or Connecting
external antennas on page 34.
• Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 34.
2 • Don’t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances.
• If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal.
• For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna.
3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit.
11
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 12 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Connecting up
02
Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX60D)
Surround right
(Gray)
6
Surround left
(Blue)
ANTENNA
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
OUT
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL IN
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND L
AM LOOP ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
ANALOG
DVD/DVR1 DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
5
USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
CENTER
R
FRONT
Center
(Green)
L
R
Listening position
Center
(Green)
L
Y-cable
AC IN
Front right
(Red)
8
5
To AC outlet
Connect each speaker.
• The front and surround speaker cables have a colorcoded connector at one end and two bare wires at the
other end.
Front left
(White)
Speaker system (SSP-LX60D)
• When connecting the center speakers, connect the Ycable dual end to the two center speakers in the
same way.
Color-coded wire
(Connect to speaker)
Color-coded connector
(Connect to rear panel)
Y-cable
• Since there is only one terminal to connect the two
center speakers, you will need to use the supplied Ycable for the connection.
• Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire.
• Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the
illustration can be identified by means of the colorcoded indicator provided on the rear-surface model
label. Match the color-coded wire with the color
indicator on the model label, then insert the colorcoded wire into the red (+) side and the other wire
into the black (–) side.
To Receiver subwoofer
• Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker
terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make
sure to insert completely.
The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug
should face up or down depending on whether it’s
being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker
terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly.
Upper terminal
12
En
Lower terminal
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 13 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Connecting up
• When connections are completed, adjust the cable
placements. If the speakers have been fixed with the
brackets, fix the cable to the groove in the brackets as
shown.
02
6
Connect the subwoofer cable.
• Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of
center, you should see the subwoofer connecting
cable. Plug this into the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER
terminal.
Caution
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
• Fasten the cables together with the spiral wrap.
Hold multiple cables together and place the wrap
over the cables from the end.
Wrap the spiral wrap with the cables in the center.
The spiral wrap may be cut at a desired length.
• Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
• Do not connect the supplied speakers to any
amplifier other than the one supplied with this
system. Connection to any other amplifier may result
in malfunction or fire.
• The center speakers and front/surround speakers are
designed with different impedance values. Be sure to
identify and connect the speakers correctly since
improper connections may result in degraded sound
or operation.
13
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 14 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Connecting up
02
Antenna wall outlet
RF antenna cable
7
ANTENNA
IN
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
Antenna wall outlet
or indoor antenna
HDD/DVD Recorder
(DVR-LX60D)
RF antenna cable
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) IN
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
AC IN
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OUT
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV 1 (RGB) ñ TV
CONTROL
5V
30 mA
ANTENNA
OUT
8
7
To Video input
To AC outlet
7
Audio/video cable
(red/white/yellow)
To Audio input
RF antenna cable
To Antenna in
7
Connect the HDD/DVD recorder to your TV. 1
• Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on
your TV.
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable
for the video connection.
TV
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
OUT
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL IN
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND L
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
DVD/DVR1 DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
ANALOG
L
R
USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
AC IN
• Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
1
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/
video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you
match the left and right outputs with their
corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.
• See Connecting a TV antenna on page 49 to connect
the antenna.
8
Connect the power cord.2
• Connect the power cord to AC inlet on the receiver
subwoofer and HDD/DVD recorder. Connect the
power cord to a wall socket.
Using this system for TV audio
If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to
this system and enjoy surround TV sound.
Important
To Audio output
TV
1 Connect the audio output jacks on your TV to the
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks on the receiver
subwoofer.
Use the red/white stereo audio cable (not supplied) for
this connection. Make sure you match the left and right
outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct
stereo sound.
• You can use the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks for
any analog source you want, such as a tape deck, etc.
• When connecting this system, be sure to switch
power off and disconnect the power cord from the
wall socket. Connect the power cord to the wall
socket only after completing all other connections.
Note
1 Other types of video connection are possible. See page 50 to page 52 for more on this.
2 • Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system.
14
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 15 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Controls and displays
03
Chapter 3
Controls and displays
Display unit
1
2
3
1 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the system on/into standby.
5
6
4 AUDIO INPUT (page 33)
Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio
inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG).
2 Front panel display
See below for details.
3
4
5 SURROUND
Use to select a Surround mode (page 26).
IR remote sensor (page 20)
6 VOLUME +/– buttons
Use to adjust the volume.
Display
1 2 3
SOUND
DTS F.SURR.
2D
2PL
9
8
kHz
MHz
7
6
5
1 DTS
Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 26).
2
F.SURR.
Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround
Advance listening modes is selected (page 27).
SURR.
Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening
modes is selected (page 27).
4
– Lights when FM mono reception is selected.
– Lights when in one of the RDS display or search
modes.
5 kHz/MHz
Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character
display (kHz for AM, MHz for FM).
6
Character display
3 SOUND
Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 27).
7
Lights when sleep timer is active (page 36).
4
Tuner indicators
– Lights when a broadcast is being received.
8 2 PL II
Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 26).
– Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being
received in auto stereo mode.
9 2D
Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 26).
15
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 16 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Controls and displays
03
HDD/DVD Recorder
1
2
3
4
STANDBY/ON
D.TV
PLTV
DV IN
DivX
COPY
USB
1
9
INPUT 2
10
A.TV indicator
Lights when analog TV is selected.
D.TV indicator
Lights when digital TV is selected.
PLTV indicator
Lights during recording started using the Pause Live
TV feature.
DivX indicator
Lights during DivX playback.
COPY indicator
Lights when copying is underway.
2 HDD/DVD
Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and
playback.
3
Disc tray
4 HDD/DVD indicator
Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is
selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected.
5 OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
6 HDMI indicator
Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI (HDCP)
compatible component.
7 Front panel display
See Display on page 17 for details.
8 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
9 Front panel inputs
See Front panel connections on page 49 for more
information on these.
16
En
7
HDMI
COMMON INTERFACE
CH
8
6
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
A.TV
5
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
A.TV/D.TV
S-VIDEO
11
VIDEO
L(MONO)
9
R
AUDIO
REC
12
10 COMMON INTERFACE slot
Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode
scrambled D.TV channels. See Common Interface on
page 17.
11 Press to start or restart playback.
Press to stop playback.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
ONE TOUCH COPY
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently
playing title to DVD or the HDD.
CH +/–
Use to change channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.
INPUT SELECT
Press to change the input used for recording.
A.TV/D.TV
Switches between analog TV antenna input and
digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV
indicators show which is selected.
12 REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in 30 minute blocks.
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 17 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Controls and displays
03
Display
1
2 3
4
L R
8
7
5
P
6
1 Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.
6
Character display
2 Lights when copying.
7 R/RW
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is
loaded.
3 Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused.
8
4
(page 86)
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
NTSC
Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC.
(page 140)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
(page 139)
Lights when the component video output is set to
progressive scan.
VPS/PDC (page 86)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
5
Recording quality indicators (page 83)
XP
Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (high
quality).
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP
(standard play).
PL (page 105)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the
recorder is in Play List mode.
2 3 (page 145)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is
displayed, the remote control mode is 1).
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is
loaded.
Common Interface
To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will need a CA
module and smart card provided by your service provider.
Different CA modules support different encryption
systems. This recorder is designed to work with modules
that support the DVB standard. Contact your service
provider to obtain the right kind of CA module.
Note that neither CA modules nor smart cards are
supplied or sold by Pioneer.
Inserting a CA module
The Common Interface card slot is located on the front
panel of the recorder.
• Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as
it will go.
LP/SLP
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long
play) or SLP (super-long play).
EP/SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP
(extended play) or SEP (super-extended play).
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN
(manual recording level) mode.
The Common Interface card slot accepts Type I and Type
II PC Cards (PCMCIA cards).
17
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 18 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
03
Controls and displays
Important
Remote control
• Functions printed in green on the remote control are
RECORDER
1
2
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
3
5
4
PAUSE
PLAY
STOP
REC
6
STOP REC HELP
INFO
TOP MENU
9
12
DISC
NAVIGATOR
accessed by switching the
to SUB.
RECEIVER
HOME MENU
GUIDE
7
8
10
11
2 RECEIVER
Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on or into standby.
3
HDD/DVD (page 83)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for
recording and playback. The receiver subwoofer’s
audio input is also switched to DVD/DVR1.1
14
PREV
NEXT
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
SETUP
1
/ ST-
22
4
F. S. SURR
7
VOLUME
ANGLE
MCACC
TIMER REC
REC MODE
/ TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
8
29
STOP
Press to stop playback.
24
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
TV CONTROL
RDS DISP
25
26
28
MAIN
PLAY
Press to start playback.
VIDEO IN
9
Playback controls (page 91)
PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
23
6
SOUND
CHANNEL
5
21
3
INPUT
18
20
4 SOUND RETRIEVER
Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio
sources (page 27).
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
0
SLEEP
16
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
SURROUND ADVANCED
27
AUDIO IN (page 33)
Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver
subwoofer’s audio inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2,
DIGITAL or ANALOG).
CM SKIP
RETURN/EXIT
13
Input select buttons
FM/AM (page 29)
Press to select the built-in radio tuner.
A.TV/ D.TV
19
MAIN/SUB switch
CM BACK
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
17
SUB
1 RECORDER
Press to switch the recorder on or into standby.
ENTER
15
MAIN
6
Recording controls (page 83)
REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE
Plus+® screen, use for One-Button-Record.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
SUB
OPEN
OPEN
7 INFO
While watching D.TV, press to display information
banner.
Press to see additional information highlighted item in
the EPG.
8 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.
Note
1 If the recorder is set to remote mode 2 or 3, the receiver subwoofer’s audio input will not be switched. See also Remote Control Mode on
page 145.
18
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 19 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Controls and displays
9 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 94, 105) / TOP MENU
(page 92)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc
is loaded.
10 GUIDE
Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit.
11 HOME MENU
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate many functions of the system.
12 /// and ENTER (Smart Jog)
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Rotate the
Smart Jog to move the cursor up or down. Press
ENTER to select the currently highlighted option.
When using the Smart Jog, turn it lighty to avoid
pressing down on the cursor keys.
While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the
Channel List screen.
Rotate the Smart Jog when playback is paused to do
a frame-by-frame search back/forward.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Turn the Smart Jog counter-clockwise during
playback to skip progressively backward through the
video playing.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Turn the Smart Jog clockwise during playback to
skip progressively forward through the video playing.
CHANNEL +/– (page 81)
While stopped, turn the Smart Jog to change the
channel of the built-in TV tuner.
13 A.TV/D.TV
Press to switch between analog TV antenna input and
digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV indicators
on the front panel show which is selected.
14 RETURN/EXIT
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
Also press to exit the MHEG application.
15 PREV / NEXT Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/track/
folder; or to display the previous or next menu page.
When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the
previous/next page.
16 VOLUME +/–
Use to adjust the volume.
17 GUIDE Plus+™ Action buttons
Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a
data channel of a digital broadcast. The function of each
button will be described on-screen, and changes
depending on the screen being displayed.
03
AUDIO (page 82, 98, 99)
Press to change the audio language or channel.
(When the recorder is stopped, press to change the
tuner audio.)
SUBTITLE (page 98)
Press to display/change the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
While watching D.TV, press to change the D.TV
subtitles.
ANGLE (page 99)
Press to switch camera angles on discs with multiangle scenes.
MCACC
Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 24).
18 TIMER REC (page 63, 86)
Press to set a timer recording.
19 / (page 95)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
/
, / (page 96)
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion
playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback
speed.
While paused, press to advance a single frame in
either direction.
When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the
previous/next day.
20 REC MODE (page 83)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture
quality).
21 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 114)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
22 Number buttons
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title
selection; channel selection, and so on.
/// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to control receiver functions.
SETUP
Use to access the menu system for surround sound
setup, tuner settings and so on (page 24, 29, 30, 31, 36).
SR+
Use to setup the SR+ features and to select the SR+
mode (page 35).
F.S.SURR
Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode
(page 27).
TEST TONE
Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup)
(page 32).
19
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 20 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
03
Controls and displays
SURROUND
Use to select a Surround mode (page 26).
ADVANCED
Use to select a Pioneer original surround mode
(page 27).
SOUND (page 28)
Press to access the sound menu, from which you can
adjust bass and treble, etc.
SLEEP
Press to set the sleep timer (page 36).
CLEAR
Press to clear an entry and start again.
23 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 84)
Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with
playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.
24 VIDEO IN (page 88)
Press to change the HDD/DVD recorder input to use for
recording.
25 MENU (page 92)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc
is loaded.
When in the GUIDE Plus+® system, use to jump directly
to the Menu bar.
26 JUKEBOX (page 121)
Press to display the Jukebox screen of the HDD/DVD
recorder, from where you can copy music to the HDD for
playback.
27 TV CONTROL (page 148)
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
TEXT (page 82)
Press to display Teletext information (in European
countries except the UK) or to start the MHEG
application display (UK only) if available during
digital broadcasts.
TV/DVD
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get
the picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD
mode’, in which you get picture and sound from the
system’s tuner (or an external input).
28 DISPLAY (page 99)
Displays/changes the on-screen information
displays.
RDS DISP
Changes RDS displays (page 30).
29 MAIN/SUB
Change from MAIN to SUB to access the green
functions/commands on the remote.
20
En
Using the remote control
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
• When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the remote control mode is reset to
Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 145.
• Use within the operating range in front of the remote
control sensor on the display unit, as shown.
30
30
7m
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 21 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Controls and displays
03
Putting the batteries in the remote
control
1 Open the battery compartment cover on the
back of the remote control.
2 Insert two AA/R6 batteries into the battery
compartment following the indications ( ,) inside
the compartment.
3
Close the cover.
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such
as leakage and bursting. Please observe the
following:
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Don’t use different kinds of battery together —
although they may look similar, different batteries
may have different voltages.
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
battery match the indications in the battery
compartment.
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
WARNING
• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
21
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 22 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
04
Before you start
Chapter 4
Before you start
Switching on
The HDD/DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver
subwoofer is located on the display unit.
Remote Control
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
STOP
STOP REC HELP
REC
INFO
TOP MENU
HOME MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
GUIDE
CM BACK
CHANNEL
Display Unit
ENTER
CM SKIP
CHANNEL
A.TV/ D.TV
RETURN/EXIT
PREV
NEXT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
OPEN MCACC
OPEN
ANGLE
OPEN
TIMER REC
REC MODE
/ TUNE+
SETUP
SR +
HDD/DVD Recorder (DVR-LX60D)
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
A.TV
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
D.TV
PLTV
DivX
COPY
HDMI
COMMON INTERFACE
USB
INPUT 2
CH
The table below shows what needs to be switched on for
various system functions:
Function
22
En
Display unit
HDD/DVD
recorder
DVD playback
On
On
CD playback
On
On
HDD playback
On
On
Radio
On
Off
Timer recording
Off
On
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
A.TV/D.TV
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
Setting up
After connecting and installing the HDD/DVD recorder
and receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set
the system up for use.
HDD/DVD recorder
• Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type
of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 56).
Receiver subwoofer
• Switch off the display demo mode (page 24).
• Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the
surround sound (page 24).
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 23 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Before you start
04
7
Press (play) to start playback.
Basic operation
This manual is split into to parts, one covering using the
receiver subwoofer, the other using the HDD/DVD
recorder. Below are some common operations and
where to find them explained in this manual.
Watching a DVD
Remember that when using the remote to control the
HDD/DVD recorder, you should point the remote towards
the display unit, not the recorder itself.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing . (Press again to
cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
See Basic playback on page 91 for more on playing discs.
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
REC
Adjust the volume.
9 Adjust the sound using the surround effects.
See Listening to your system on page 26 for details.
STOP
STOP REC HELP
Listening to a CD
INFO
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
8
HOME MENU
GUIDE
1
Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.
3
Press HDD/DVD to select DVD.
CM BACK
CHANNEL
4
Load a CD and start playback (page 93).
5
Adjust the volume.
ENTER
CM SKIP
CHANNEL
A.TV/ D.TV
RETURN/EXIT
PREV
NEXT
VOLUME
6 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 26).
Watching a title recorded on the HDD
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
SETUP
1
2
ANGLE
MCACC
TIMER REC
REC MODE
/ TUNE+
Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.
3
Switch on your TV.
4
Press HDD/DVD to select HDD.
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.
3 Switch on your TV.
Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct
video input.
4
1
Press HDD/DVD to select DVD.
5 Press OPEN/CLOSE on the HDD/DVD recorder
to open the disc tray.
6 Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play
face-down).
5
Start playback of the HDD title (page 92).
6
Adjust the volume.
7 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 26).
Listening to the radio
1
Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2
Tune to a station (page 29).
3
Adjust the volume.
4 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 26).
23
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 24 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Getting started
05
Chapter 5
Getting started
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
System demo setting
Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this
starts when you plug in for the first time).
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
ANGLE
MCACC
TIMER REC
REC MODE
0
SLEEP
SETUP
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
/ TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
8
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
3
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
6
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
VIDEO IN
9
SOUND
MENU
1
Switch the system into standby.
2
Press SETUP.
The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system
measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening
area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for
channel delay and channel level. After you have set up
the microphone provided, the system uses the
information from a series of test tones to optimize the
speaker settings and equalization (Acoustic Calibration
EQ) for your particular room.1
JUKEBOX
CHANNEL
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
SURROUND ADVANCED
CLEAR
INPUT
Using the Auto MCACC setup for
optimal surround sound
3 Use the / buttons to select DEMO from the
menu, then press ENTER.
4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then
press ENTER.
Select from:
• DEMO ON – Switches the demo display on.
• DEMO OFF – Switches the demo display off and the
system into standby.
Important
• The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud;
however, do not turn the volume down during setup
as this may result in a sub-optimal setup.
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the MCACC setup.
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
SETUP
PAUSE
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC HELP
TOP MENU
INFO
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
ANGLE
MCACC
TIMER REC
REC MODE
/ TUNE+
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
2
3
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
ENTER
5
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
0
SLEEP
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
Note
1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout).
24
En
VIDEO IN
9
SOUND
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 25 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Getting started
05
1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP
MIC jack on the rear panel.
MCACC
SETUP MIC
ANTENNA
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
OUT
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL IN
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND L
AM LOOP ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
ANALOG
DVD/DVR1 DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
L
R
USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
AC IN
2 Place the microphone at your normal listening
position.
Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by
using a table or chair.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press RECEIVER
to turn the power on.
4 Press MCACC.
Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC. The
volume increases automatically and the system outputs
a series of test tones.
• To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished,
press MCACC. The unit will continue to use the
previous settings.
• If the ambient noise level is too high, NOISY blinks in
the display for five seconds. To exit and check the
noise levels1, press MCACC, or to try again, press
ENTER when RETRY shows in the display.
• If you see an ERR MIC or ERR SP message in the
display, there may be a problem with your mic or the
speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER
when you see RETRY2.
When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level
returns to normal, COMPLETE3 shows in the display, and
Acoustic Calibration EQ is activated.4
Note
1 • If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be
affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup.
2 If this doesn’t work, press MCACC, turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the ERR message, then try the Auto MCACC setup
again.
3 If COMPLETE doesn’t appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again.
4 See Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 28 to switch on/off Acoustic Calibration EQ.
25
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 26 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
06
Listening to your system
Chapter 6
Listening to your system
The choices that appear in the display will vary according
to the type of source that’s playing.
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D
or DTS indicator lights.
• AUTO – Auto listening mode (see above)
• DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic) – 4.1 channel surround
sound for use with any two-channel source
Auto listening mode
The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to
any source as it was mastered: the output from the
speakers mirrors the channels in the source material.
If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the
Front Surround modes will give the best results (see
Using Front Stage Surround Advance on page 27).
7
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
TV CONTROL
MAIN
• MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) – 5.1 channel
surround sound, especially suited to music sources,
for use with any two-channel source; see Dolby Pro
Logic II Music settings below
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo on page 27.
0
SLEEP
• MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) – 5.1 channel
surround sound, especially suited to movie sources,
for use with any two-channel source
SUB
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings
When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see
above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center
Width, Dimension, and Panorama.
JUKEBOX
SETUP
• Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening
mode.
If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D
or DTS indicator lights.
• You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in
surround sound. Surround sound is generated from
stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic
decoding modes.
If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the
Front Surround modes will give the best results (see
Using Front Stage Surround Advance on page 27).
7
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
0
SLEEP
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
TV CONTROL
MAIN
26
En
SUB
• Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening
mode.
• You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
2
ENTER
5
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
3
8
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
SURROUND ADVANCED
TV CONTROL
VIDEO IN
9
MAIN
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
SUB
0
SLEEP
Listening in surround sound
/ TUNE+
1 With Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press
SOUND.
2 Use / to select C WIDTH, DIMEN. or
PANORAMA then press ENTER.
• C WIDTH (Center Width) – Provides a better blend of
the front speakers by spreading the center channel
between the front right and left speakers, making it
sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower
settings).
• DIMEN. (Dimension) – Adjusts the depth of the
surround sound balance from front to back, making
the sound more distant (minus settings), or more
forward (positive settings).
• PANORAMA – Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’
effect.
3 Use / to adjust the setting then press ENTER
to confirm.
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 27 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Listening to your system
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective
when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as
described on page 6.
/ ST
4
F. S. SURR
7
ENTER
5
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
VIDEO IN
9
06
• TV SURR. – Surround sound for mono or stereo TV
broadcasts
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programming
• ADV.GAME – Suitable for TV game units
• VIRTUAL – A virtual surround effect using just the
subwoofer and front speakers.
• X-STEREO – Powerful surround sound for stereo
music sources
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
Listening in stereo
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
You can listen to any source — stereo or multichannel —
in stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all
channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers
and the subwoofer.
0
SLEEP
INPUT
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
F. S. SURR
7
• Press F.S.SURR to select a Front Stage Surround
Advance mode.
Press repeatedly to select FOCUS5.1, WIDE5.1 or
EXTRAPWR.
8
VIDEO IN
9
SURROUND ADVANCED
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
0
SLEEP
INPUT
• FOCUS5.1 – Use to provide a rich surround sound
effect directed to the center area where the left and
right speakers’ sound projection converges.
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
• WIDE5.1 – Use to provide a surround sound effect to
a wider area than FOCUS5.1 mode.
• EXTRAPWR – Outputs stereo sound (in the case of
multi-channel sources, down-mixed stereo sound)
from the surround speakers for powerful stereo
effect.
Using Advanced Surround
The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any
multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional
surround sound effects. These modes are designed to
provide optimum listening effect when using the
Standard surround setup described on page 8.
7
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
VOLUME
DISPLAY
• Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows
in the display.
• You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
Using the Sound Retriever
When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA
compression process, sound quality often suffers from
an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature
employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality
sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring
sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over
after compression.
0
SLEEP
INPUT
Tip
CHANNEL
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
TV CONTROL
MAIN
• This feature is effective when used together with the
Jukebox function of the HDD/DVD recorder.
SUB
RECORDER
• Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced
Surround mode.
Press repeatedly to select:
• ACTION – Suitable for action movies
• UNPLUGED – Suitable for acoustic musical sources
• EXPANDED – Wide sound field
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
REC
PLAY
STOP REC HELP
STOP
INFO
27
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 28 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Listening to your system
06
• While listening to a stereo source, press SOUND
RETRIEVER.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• RTRV ON — Switches the Sound Retriever on.
• RTRV OFF — Switches the Sound Retriever off.
Using Quiet and Midnight listening
modes
The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or
treble in a sound source.
The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear
effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels.
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ
1
You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration
EQ set in Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal
surround sound on page 24.
2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press
ENTER.
SETUP
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
/ TUNE+
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
2
3
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
ENTER
5
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
VIDEO IN
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
0
INPUT
1
Adjusting the bass and treble
Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone.
TV CONTROL
MAIN
3 Use the / buttons to select QUIET or MIDNIGHT
then press ENTER to confirm.
• To cancel the Quiet or Midnight listening modes,
select BASS/TRE.
9
SOUND
SLEEP
SUB
Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select MCACC EQ then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to switch EQ ON or EQ OFF
then press ENTER to confirm.
• On the EQ OFF setting, equalization is set to off and
speaker settings (channel delay and channel level)
remains as it is set.
• Acoustic Calibration EQ is set to on automatically
after Auto MCACC setup is used.
1
3 Use the / buttons to select BASS/TRE then
press ENTER.
• Selecting BASS/TRE cancels the Quiet and Midnight
listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the
same time.
4 Use the / buttons to select BASS or TREBLE;
use the / buttons to adjust the sound then press
ENTER to confirm.
Boosting the bass level
There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the
bass in a source.
Press SOUND.
Enhancing dialogue
2 Use the / buttons to select BASSMODE then
press ENTER.
The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make
the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in
a TV or movie sound track.
3 Use the / buttons to select the sound then
press ENTER to confirm.
Select between OFF, MUSIC or CINEMA.
1
Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select DIALOGUE then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select the amount
dialogue enhancement then press ENTER to confirm.
Select between OFF, MID or MAX.
En
Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press
ENTER.
1
28
Press SOUND.
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 29 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Listening to the radio
07
Chapter 7
Listening to the radio
• Manual tuning – Press TUNE +/– repeatedly to
change the displayed frequency.
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
• Auto tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until the
frequency display starts to move, then release. The
tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to
keep searching.
• High-speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until
the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the
button held down until you reach the frequency you
want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the
manual tuning method.
Listening to the radio
The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and
lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have
to manually tune in every time you want to listen.
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
REC
STOP
INFO
TOP MENU
HOME MENU
GUIDE
CM BACK
CHANNEL
ENTER
CM SKIP
CHANNEL
A.TV/ D.TV
RETURN/EXIT
PREV
NEXT
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
SETUP
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
VOLUME
ANGLE
MCACC
TIMER REC
REC MODE
/ TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
3
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
VIDEO IN
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
0
SLEEP
INPUT
TV CONTROL
MAIN
If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the
reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by
switching to mono.
STOP REC HELP
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Improving poor FM reception
1
Tune to an FM radio station then press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to choose FM MODE then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select FM MONO then
press ENTER.
The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono
reception mode.
Select FM AUTO above to switch back to auto-stereo
mode (the stereo indicator (
) lights when receiving a
stereo broadcast).
Improving poor AM sound
The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM
radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched
off. Also try changing the position and direction of the
AM loop antenna.
Changing the noise cut mode
If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying
the above, you may be able to improve it using a different
noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best.
SUB
1
Tune to an AM radio station then press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to choose NOISECUT then
press ENTER.
1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press
repeatedly to select the FM or AM band.
The display shows the band and frequency.
3 Use the / buttons to select a Noise cut mode
(1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER.
2 Tune to a frequency.
There are three tuning modes — manual, auto, and highspeed:
29
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 30 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Listening to the radio
07
Memorizing stations
Displaying RDS information
You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always
have easy access to your favorite stations without having
to tune in manually each time.
You can display the different types of RDS information
available.2
1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station.
Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise
Cut mode (AM) as necessary. These settings are saved
along with the preset.
2
S U
U
1
2
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
S
ENTER
5
8
OUC CO
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
SURROUND ADVANCED
Press SETUP.
O
3
VIDEO IN
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
0
SLEEP
3 Use the / buttons to choose ST.MEM. then
press ENTER.
INPUT
4 Use the / buttons to select the station preset
you want then press ENTER.
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
Listening to station presets
1
Make sure the tuner function is selected.
2
Use the ST +/– buttons to select a station preset.
• Press RDS DISP for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
Using RDS
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information — the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
• SEARCH – PTY search (see below)
• Current tuner frequency
You can search the following program types:1
NEWS – News
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO – General Information
SPORT – Sport
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE – National or regional
culture, theater, etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
VARIED – Usually talk-based
material, such as quiz shows or
interviews
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical
music
OTHER M – Music not fitting
above categories
WEATHER – Weather reports
FINANCE – Stock market reports,
commerce, trading, etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
SOCIAL – Social affairs
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public expressing
their views by phone
TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel
rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests and
hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
COUNTRY – Country music
NATION M – Popular music in a
language other than English
OLDIES – Popular music from the
’50s and ’60s
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT – Documentary
Searching for RDS programs
You can search for a program type listed above.
1
Press the FM/AM button for the FM band.3
2 Press RDS DISP repeatedly until SEARCH appears in
the display.
3 Use the / buttons to select the program type
you want to hear.
4 Press ENTER to start the search.
The system searches the station presets for a match. If it
finds one, searching stops for five sec.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
ENTER within the five seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types, TEST, ALARM, and NO TYPE. ALARM and TEST are used for emergency announcements.
You can’t search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot be found.
2 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO RADIO TEXT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically
switch to the PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, NO DATA or NO TYPE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
3 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
30
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 31 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Surround sound settings
08
Chapter 8
Surround sound settings
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
Using the Setup menu
From the Setup menu you can access all the surround
sound settings of the system1, including channel levels,
speaker distances, dynamic range adjustment and dual
mono audio playback.
Use the following buttons to use the Setup menu.
SETUP
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
Select stereo or multichannel playback for a source.
2
Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select CH LEVEL, then
press ENTER.
4 Use / to select a channel; / to adjust the
level of that channel.
• You can adjust the level of each channel by ±10 dB.
• If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, or a stereo
source is playing in Auto mode, you will not be able
to adjust the center or surround channels.
5
/ TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
8
3
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
6
VIDEO IN
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
0
SLEEP
Press ENTER when you’re finished.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
SURROUND ADVANCED
INPUT
1
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
Speaker distance setting
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 24) should give you
the best surround sound setup. However you may find
that by further adjustment of the speaker distance
settings you can improve the surround sound in your
listening room.
Set the distance of each speaker from your normal
listening position.
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
1
Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DISTANCE, then
press ENTER.
Channel level setting
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 24) should give you
the best surround sound setup. However you may find
that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can
improve the surround sound in your listening room.
3 Use / to select a speaker; / to adjust the
distance.
Adjust the following speakers:
• L – Front left speaker
• C – Center speaker
This method of setting the channel levels allows you to
listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback
channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo
playback are independent of the settings for surround
sound playback.
A further method of setting the channel levels is to use
the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels
using the test tone on page 32 for more on this.
• R – Front right speaker
• SR – Surround right speaker
• SL – Surround left speaker
• SW – Subwoofer
Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.3 m to 9.0 m.
4
Press ENTER when you’re finished.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Note
1 There are other settings you can adjust from the Setup menu; these are explained in Listening to the radio on page 29 and Additional information
on page 36.
31
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 32 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Surround sound settings
08
Dynamic Range Control1
When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low
volume, low level sounds — including some of the dialog
— can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the
Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by
bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high
level peaks.
Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital
soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks.
1
Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DRC, then press
ENTER.
3 Use / to select a setting.
Select one of the following:
• DRC OFF (default) – No dynamic range adjustment
(use when listening at higher volume)
• DRC MID – Mid setting
• DRC HIGH – Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds
are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are
increased)
4
Press ENTER to exit.
Dual mono setting2
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS
soundtracks should be played. You can also use this
setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs
recorded with bilingual audio.
1
Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DUALMONO,
then press ENTER.
3 Use / to select a setting.
Select one of the following:
• CH1 MONO (default) – Only channel 1 is played
• CH2 MONO – Only channel 2 is played
• CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the
front speakers
4
Press ENTER to exit.
Adjusting the channel levels using
the test tone
If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test
tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see
Channel level setting on page 31). A test tone is played
through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the
level as it plays.
Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources
are independent of the settings for surround sound
sources.
SETUP
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
/ TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
3
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
VIDEO IN
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
0
SLEEP
INPUT
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
1 Press SURROUND to select the Auto listening
mode.
• If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two
channel) playback, select the STEREO listening
mode.
2 Press TEST TONE.
The test tone is output from each speaker in turn.
3 While a test tone is playing, use the / buttons
to adjust that channel level.
The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test
tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can
adjust the level of each channel by ±10 dB.
• You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output
using the VOLUME +/– buttons (this does not affect
the channel level settings).
• If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, you will not
be able to adjust the center or surround channels.
• Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer
produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We
suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening
to a source. See the method described in Channel
level setting on page 31.
4 When you’re done, press ENTER to exit test tone
setup.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Note
1 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD/DVD recorder — see Audio DRC on
page 141.
2 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD/DVD recorder — see Switching audio
channels on page 99.
32
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 33 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Other connections
9
Chapter 9
Other connections
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cord to the wall socket.
Connecting auxiliary components
This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to
connect external components, such as your MD or CD
recorder.
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
VR1 DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL
AL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
OUT
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL IN
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND L
You can connect both analog and digital external audio
sources to this system. Digital audio sources include
digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog
sources include your TV. See also Using this system for
TV audio on page 14 and Connecting auxiliary
components above.
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
STOP
1 If the system isn’t already on, press RECEIVER
to switch on.
Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite
receiver, etc.) is switched on.
ANTENNA
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Listening to an external audio source
AM LOOP ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
ANALOG
DVD/DVR1 DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
L
2 Use the AUDIO IN button to select an audio input
source.
R
USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
DVD/DVR1
AC IN
ANALOG
To digital audio
output (optical)
DVD/DVR2
DIGITAL
3 If necessary, start playback of the external
source.
MD, CD Recorder, etc.
• Connect the DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) or DIGITAL
(OPTICAL) jack on the rear panel to the optical
output of an external playback component.
These include digital components such as an MD player,
digital satellite, or a game system.
Connecting an analog audio component
You can use the ANALOG input jacks to connect an
analog audio component, such as a tape player. See
Using this system for TV audio on page 14 for connection
details (this explains connecting the audio output from
your TV, but any analog audio component can be
connected).
33
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 34 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
9
Other connections
Connecting external antennas
For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinylinsulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors.
Leave the loop antenna connected.
For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook
up an external FM antenna.
external FM antenna
external AM antenna
Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma
display
If you have a Pioneer plasma display1, you can use an
SR+ cable2 to connect it to this unit and take advantage
of various convenient features, such as controlling this
unit via the plasma display’s remote sensor, automatic
video input switching of the plasma display, display unit
messages appearing on the plasma display screen, and
automatic volume muting on the plasma display.
Outdoor antenna
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated Wire)
CONTROL IN
(5 m to 6 m)
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
OUT
SUBWOOFER
CONTROL IN
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND L
AM LOOP ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
ANALOG
DVD/DVR1 DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
L
Loop antenna
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
OUT
CONTROL IN
SPEAKERS
R
AM LOOP ANTENNA
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
AC IN
ANTENNA
MCACC
SETUP MIC
R
USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
AM LOOP ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
DVD/DVR1 DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL
ANALOG
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
L
PAL connector
R
USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT.
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
AC IN
CONTROL
OUT
Pioneer plasma display
Important
• With an SR+ cable connected, the remote must now
be pointed towards your plasma display rather than
the display unit of the receiver subwoofer in order to
control the receiver subwoofer.
• Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN jack of this unit to the CONTROL OUT
jack of your plasma display.3
Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need to
make a few settings in the unit—see SR+ Setup for
Pioneer plasma displays on page 35.
Note
1 This system is compatible with all Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.
2 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for more information on obtaining an SR+ cable.
3 You won’t be able to use the remote sensor of this unit with the CONTROL IN jack of this unit connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of your
plasma display. You can use the remote sensor of the plasma display (even in standby) as long as the power isn’t switched off.
34
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 35 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Other connections
9
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
Automatic plasma display input switching
Make the following settings if you have connected a
Pioneer plasma display to this unit using an SR+ cable.
In order that the plasma display can switch automatically
to the correct input when you switch the input function of
the receiver subwoofer, you need to tell it how your
system is connected.
/
SETUP
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
/
TIMER REC
REC MODE
/ TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
3
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
VIDEO IN
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
0
SLEEP
INPUT
For example, if you connected your HDD/DVD recorder to
the DV1 input on the receiver subwoofer, and to input 2
on your plasma display, select the DV1 PDP2 setting here
so that when you switch the input function of the receiver
subwoofer to DV1 to watch your HDD/DVD recorder, the
plasma display will automatically switch to input 2.
For each receiver subwoofer input function (DV1 (DVD/
DVR1), DV2 (DVD/DVR2), DIG (DIGITAL), ANA
(ANALOG)) you can select:
• NONE – does not switch the plasma display input
TV CONTROL
MAIN
1
• PDP1 to PDP7 – switches the plasma display input to
one of the numbered inputs. (Note that the number
displayed may vary depending on the plasma display
to which you connect this unit.)
SUB
Press SR+.
2 Use the / buttons to choose SETUP, then
press ENTER.
• TVTN – switches the plasma display to its built-in
TV tuner
3 Use the / buttons to choose the setting you
want to adjust.
The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle
through the display. See below for a full list and
description of each.
• Note that certain PDP inputs (ex. PDP7) may be
referred to on your plasma display as ‘PC Input’.
4
Use the / buttons to adjust the setting.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make other settings.
6 When you’re done, press ENTER to leave the SR+
setup menu.
Automatic plasma display volume muting
When Volume Control is switched on, the volume of the
plasma display is automatically muted when the receiver
subwoofer is switched on, or the receiver subwoofer’s
input function is changed to one that you would want to
hear the sound from the receiver subwoofer rather than
the plasma display (DVD, for example).
• VOL.C ON – When this unit is switched on, or the
input function is changed, the volume on the plasma
display is muted so only sound from this unit is
heard.
• VOL.C OFF – This unit does not control the volume of
the plasma display.
Note
• The SR+ setting remains in effect even in standby.
• The SR+ setting does not affect the FM/AM tuner
function.
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma
display
1
2
Press SR+ on the remote.
Use / to select SR+ ON then press ENTER.
• The SR+ setting is maintained even after switching
the receiver subwoofer into standby then back on.
Automatic muting and input switching will be
effective when the receiver subwoofer is switched on.
• If you disconnect the SR+ cable or switch the plasma
display off while SR+ is on, the SR+ ON setting
remains.
• To switch to SR+ OFF, follow steps 1 and 2, selecting
SR+ OFF.
Note
• You can control this unit with the plasma display’s
remote sensor even in standby, but you can’t control
this unit with either this unit’s remote sensor or the
plasma display’s remote sensor when the plasma
display is switched off (AC off) and the SR+ cable is
connected to the CONTROL IN jack of this unit.
35
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 36 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Additional information
10
Chapter 10
Additional information
• DTS-CD – Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but
note that the beginning of regular CD tracks may be
skipped.
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
SETUP
1
/ ST-
4
F. S. SURR
7
/ TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR + ONE TOUCH COPY
3
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
6
/ TUNE- TEST TONE
SURROUND ADVANCED
Setting the sleep timer
/ ST+ PAUSE LIVE TV
SLEEP
9
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
SOUND
MENU
CLEAR
JUKEBOX
0
VIDEO IN
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
TEXT
TV/DVD
RDS DISP
0
SLEEP
INPUT
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
Dimming the display
You can choose to dim the display if you find it too bright.1
1
Press SETUP.
The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after
a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying
about it.2
1 Press the SLEEP button to select an option.
Choose between the following options:
• SLP ON – Switches off after about an hour
2 Use the / buttons to select DIMMER then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select LIGHT or DARK
then press ENTER.
• SLP OFF – Cancels the sleep timer
After selecting SLP ON, you can press SLEEP again to
check how much time is left. Each line indicates
approximately 12 minutes (remaining):
SLP - - - - -
DTS CD setting
If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change
this setting to hear the decoded signal.
1
Switch the system into standby.
Resetting the system
2
Press SETUP.
Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the
factory default.
3 Use the / buttons to select CD TYPE from the
menu, then press ENTER.
4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then
press ENTER.
Select from:
• NORMAL – Use for playback of regular audio CDs.
Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when played.
1
Switch the system on.
2 Press and hold SURROUND then press the
STANDBY/ON button on the display unit.
The next time you switch on, all the system settings
should be reset.
Note
1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting.
2 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. The HDD/DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer.
36
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 37 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Additional information
10
Don’t...
Installation and maintenance
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come,
so please bear in mind the following points when
choosing a location:
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or
stereo rack.
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity,
including near radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the system will
be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in
your stereo system that becomes hot in use.
Use near a television or monitor as you may experience
interference — especially if the television uses an indoor
antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be
exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — this may
prevent proper cooling of the system unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough
to support all four of the system unit’s feet.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
• If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from
the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
• If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the DVR-LX60D HDD/DVD recorder, try setting the recorder’s
audio-related settings back to their defaults — see The Initial Setup menu on page 137.
General
Problem
Remedy
The power does not turn on, or
switches off suddenly (an error
message may be displayed at
startup).
• Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on.
• Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the
system to shut off automatically.
• Check that the speakers are connected correctly.
• Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer.
• Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model.
• Try reducing the volume level.
• If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your
dealer for servicing.
No sound is output when an
input function is selected.
• If you’re playing from the HDD/DVD recorder, make sure that the digital coaxial cable is
connected properly. Also make sure that the HDD/DVD recorder’s Digital Out and DTS Out
settings are set to On, and that the MPEG Out setting is set to MPEG PCM.
• If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see
Connecting auxiliary components on page 33).
• Turn up the volume.
No sound from surround or
center speakers.
• Refer to Channel level setting on page 31 to check the speaker levels.
• Check that you haven’t selected the AUTO, STEREO, or VIRTUAL mode (see Listening in
surround sound on page 26).
• Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 10).
• If you’re playing from the HDD/DVD recorder, check that the Dolby Digital Out setting is
set to Dolby Digital.
• If the source is 96 kHz, this will be played in stereo. If you want to play it in surround
sound, set the HDD/DVD recorder’s 96 kHz PCM Out setting to 96 kHz 48 kHz.
37
En
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 38 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
10
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
Can’t operate using the remote • Replace the batteries (Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 21).
control.
• Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor ( Using the remote control on page 20).
• Remove any obstacles or operate from another position.
• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light.
• For operating the HDD/DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and coaxial cable
are connected (page 10).
• If the receiver subwoofer is connected to a Pioneer plasma display with an SR+ cable,
check that the plasma display is switched on. Point the remote control at the plasma
display in order to operate the receiver subwoofer.
• Check that nothing is mistakenly plugged into the CONTROL IN jack.
Tuner
Problem
Remedy
Considerable noise in radio
broadcasts.
• Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 10) and adjust the direction
and position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM
antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 34).
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You
may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 34).
• Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away.
Auto tuning does not pick up
some stations.
• The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal.
For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna.
Error Messages
38
En
Message
Description
2CH ONLY
• An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the
current source is a multichannel source.
96K
• An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital.
EXIT
• Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity.
NOISY
• Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully.
ERR MIC
• An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is
not connected properly.
ERR SP
• An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are
not connected properly.
EEP ERROR
• Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
NO SPTYP
• Try switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer.
RCS-LX60D_WV.book 39 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時57分
Additional information
10
•
Glossary
Dolby Digital
A multi-channel audio
encoding system developed
by Dolby Laboratories that
enables far more audio to be
stored on a disc than PCM
encoding.
Miscellaneous
Power requirements . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W
Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W
Dimensions . . . . .200 mm (W) x 375 mm (H) x 428 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg
•
Accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) . . . . . . . . . 2
Coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Dolby
Pro Logic II
DTS
A matrix decoding technology
developed by Dolby
Laboratories that expands any
two-channel source audio,
such as CDs and TV
broadcasts, to a five-channel
playback (left/center/right/left
surround/right surround),
resulting in a surround
experience.
A multi-channel audio
encoding system developed
by DTS that enables far more
audio to be stored on a disc
than PCM encoding.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Spacers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
This operating instructions
SSP-LX60D Speaker system
(Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speakers x2)
•
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Specifications
SX-LX60D Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer
•
•
Amplifier section
(1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω)
Subwoofer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω)
FM tuner section
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω, unbalanced
•
AM tuner section
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Loop antenna
•
Subwoofer section
Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bass-reflex floor type
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz
Maximum Input Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
Center speakers
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system
Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W
Dimensions . . 100 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) x 102.5 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg
RMS Power Output:
Front, Center, Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel
•
Front/surround speakers
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system
Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W
Dimensions . . 100 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) x 102.5 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg
•
Accessories
Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Non-skid pads (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Spiral wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Note
• Specifications and design subject to possible
modification without notice, due to improvements.
39
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 40 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Section Two
HDD/DVD Recorder
DVR-LX60D
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 41 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Section Two
Contents
01 Before you start
07 Playback
Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 43
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents
of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . .
02 Connections
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a TV antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the S-video or component video output . . . . .
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . .
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
49
49
50
50
51
52
52
53
54
55
55
03 Getting started
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
09 Editing
04 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme
guide
10 Copying and backup
62
62
64
71
05 Using the digital electronic programme guide
The Digital EPG system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Digital EPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting timer programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other useful EPG functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
74
74
78
06 Recording
About DVD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . .
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) . .
Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . .
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . .
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVD-RW Auto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
80
80
80
81
83
83
84
86
87
87
88
88
89
90
94
95
96
96
96
98
98
99
99
99
08 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For users receiving digital broadcast services . . . . . 58
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system . . . . . . . . . . . 59
The GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . .
91
91
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
114
115
119
11 Using the Jukebox
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying files via USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Jukebox albums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
121
123
124
12 The PhotoViewer
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer. . . .
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reloading files from a disc or USB device . . . . . . .
Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting multiple files or folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . .
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
126
126
127
127
128
128
129
129
131
41
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 42 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Section Two
13 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
14 The Video Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 135
15 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Selecting other languages for language options . . . 147
Using Software Update (Digital tuner) . . . . . . . . . . 147
16 Additional information
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . 148
TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
If the picture freezes and the front panel and
remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . 155
On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Front-panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Specifications (DVR-LX60D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
42
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 43 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Before you start
01
Chapter 1
Before you start
Symbols used in this manual
The following icons are provided to help you quickly
identify which instructions you need for which kind of
disc.
HDD
HDD
DVD
Any type of DVD disc (recordable or
playback only), finalized or not.
DVD-Video
Disc/content format playback
compatibility
Compatible media
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x
to 6x
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x,
ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x
• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
Commercially produced DVD, finalized
Video mode DVD-R/-RW.
DVD (Video)
Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized)
DVD (VR)
VR mode DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x,
ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD
writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt
the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs
between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we
recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’
limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs.
Model
CD
Audio CD
DVR-7000
Video CD
Video CD
DVR-3100/
DVR-5100H
Super VCD
Super VCD
Playable
Recordable
Yes*1,2,3
No
*1
Yes
No
*1
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
*3
Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
*2
WMA/MP3
WMA or MP3 files
DivX
DivX files
ALL
All of the above
Readable file system
This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the
following file systems1: ISO 9660*, UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50,
UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01.
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
Note
1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly.
• MP3/WMA files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video files and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or
ISO 9660 file systems.
43
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 44 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
01
Before you start
HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility
This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides HDD functionality. The
table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types.
HDD
Marks used in this manual
HDD
DVD-R
DVD (VR)
DVD-RW
DVD (Video)
*1
DVD (VR)
DVD (Video)
*1
*2
DVD+R
DVD
+RW
DVDRAM
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
*13, 16
Logos
Re-recordable/Erasable
*3
*3
*3
*14
Editing of recorded programmes
*4
*4
*4
*4
Recording of Copy-once protected
material
*12
Playback in other players/recorders
n/a
*5
*7
*6
*6, 15
*8
*9
16:9 and 4:3 programme recording
*10, 11
*11
*11
*11
Notes to table
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 132).
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 132).
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase.
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing.
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback.
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units)
(page 88).
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback.
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback.
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback.
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off
(page 143).
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM.
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only.
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and
Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs
from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited.
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor
increase the number of recordable titles left.
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback.
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be
recorded (page 132). In this case, initialization will take about an hour.
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL (Double-Layer)
discs contain two recordable layers on a single side,
giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a
conventional single-layer disc. This recorder can record
to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
44
*6
*12
Chase play
Bilingual broadcast recording of
both audio channels
En
*12
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or
DVD+R DL discs recorded on this recorder on other
DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note
that some DVD recorders/players may not play even
finalized DL discs.)
• This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or
DVD+R DL disc:
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 45 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Before you start
01
Correct operation has been confirmed for DL discs:
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
That’s
JVC
• DVD+R DL 2.4x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
RICOH
• DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
RICOH
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which
contains DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other
side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio
material.
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with
the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play.
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc,
the opposite side to that being played will be scratched.
Scratched discs may not be playable.
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD
-Audio content will not play.
For more detailed information on the DualDisc
specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or
disc retailer.
Other disc compatibility
In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a
wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable
discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc
and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that
some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may
be in an unplayable format — see below for further
compatibility information.
Video CD
CD-R
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD,
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or
DivX files
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and
Video CD/Super VCD)
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible media: DVD-ROM, DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/
+RW, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB
About DualDisc playback
Audio CD
CD-R/-RW compatibility
CD-RW
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
Windows Media Audio (WMA)
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended)
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
• VBR WMA playback: No
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)1 file playback: No
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
not use for other file types)
• File structure: Up to 99 folders/999 files (if these limits
are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits
are playable)
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio)
compatibility
This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by
using Windows Media Player for Windows XP, Windows
Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series.
Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft
Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a
license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
Note
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of
compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see
the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software.
45
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 46 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
01
Before you start
DivX video compatibility
DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the
DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc. This recorder can play
DivX video files burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs.
Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual
DivX video files are called “Titles”. When naming files/
titles on a CD-R/-RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind
that by default they will be played in alphabetical order.
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*
still image files
*File format used by digital still cameras
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6)
with standard playback of DivX® media files.
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that
all files with the .avi extension are recognized as
MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video
files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder.
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used
for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use
for other file types)
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files.
®
DivX VOD content
DivX
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/
999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that
this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be
playable in this recorder due to the setting of the
application software used to create the disc. In these
particular instances, check with the software publisher
for more detailed information.
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on
this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with
your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by
generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you
submit to your provider.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are
not compatible with this recorder.
Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed
number of times. When you load a disc containing this
type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays
is shown on-screen and you then have the option of
playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining
plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains
expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is
displayed.
Dolby Digital
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of
plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and
play the content as often as you like, and no message will
be displayed.
Important
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system. This
restricts playback of content to specific, registered
devices.
46
• Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the
recorder on page 161) will not cause you to lose your
registration code.
• Official DivX® Certified product.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
En
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not
authorized for this recorder, the message
Authorization Error is displayed and the content
will not play.
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 47 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Before you start
DTS
01
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
DVB
The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or DVB for short,
is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting,
covering terrestrial, cable and satellite broadcasts.
Based around the MPEG-2 coding system, these open
standards ensure that compliant systems are able to
work together, independent of manufacturer.
DVB is extremely flexible, being able to deliver virtually
any kind of digital content to the home, including High
Definition and Standard Definition TV, broadband
multimedia content and interactive services.
DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project.
About the internal hard disk drive
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
equipment. When used without the proper care or in the
wrong conditions, it is possible that recorded contents
may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making
even normal playback or recording impossible. Please
understand that in the event of repair or replacement of
the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings
will be lost.
• While the recorder is switched on (including during
EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not
unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity
off from the breaker switch.
• Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,
please follow the steps below:
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the
front panel display, wait at least two minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
• The HDD is very delicate. If used over time in an
improper manner or in an unsuitable environment, it
is possible that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.
Optimizing HDD performance
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see
Optimize HDD on page 133).
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to
protect against possible HDD failure.
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up
your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to
protect against accidental loss.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept
responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from
HDD failure.
• Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes
during EPG download when the display shows EPG).
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
47
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 48 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
02
Connections
Chapter 2
Connections
Rear panel connections
1
2
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
3
4
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
IN
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
6
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
7
8
CONTROL
9 10
1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN)
jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT
jack for connection to your TV.
2 INPUT 3
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for
connection to a VCR or other source component.
3 AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.
See AV2/L1 In on page 140 for how to set this up.
4 HDMI OUT
HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video.
5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL)
Connect to the DVD/DVR1 coaxial jack on the receiver
subwoofer.
6 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or
monitor with a component video input.
7 OUTPUT
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
8 AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See AV1 Out on page 140 for how to set
this up.
9 G-LINK™
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable
GUIDE Plus+® to control an external satellite receiver,
etc.
48
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OUT
En
5
5V
30 mA
11
12
10 CONTROL IN
Connect to the CONTROL OUT terminal of the receiver
subwoofer.
11 ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT
Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL)
IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) OUT jack for connection to your TV.
12 AC IN – Power inlet
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 49 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Connections
02
Antenna wall outlet
or indoor antenna
Antenna wall outlet
Front panel connections
On the front panel there is a flip-down cover that hides
more connections.
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) IN
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
Left side:
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
DV IN
USB
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OUT
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
CONTROL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
5V
30 mA
ANTENNA
OUT
13
14
15
13 DV IN
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a
DV camcorder.
To antenna input
14 USB port (Type B)
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer
or PC.
15 USB port (Type A)
USB port for connecting a digital camera, keyboard or
other USB device.
Right side:
INPUT 2
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
TV
Important
• If there is only one antenna outlet on your wall, use a
divider.
• Do not connect a component that can receive analog
signals to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT.
If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital
services, connect your antenna’s output to the
ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector using one of the
supplied RF antenna cables. Next, connect the recorder
to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector.
16
16 INPUT 2
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and Svideo), especially suitable for camcorders, game
consoles, portable audio, etc.
Antenna
wall outlet
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
Connecting a TV antenna
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for
terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV broadcasts.
If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now, use one
of the supplied RF antenna cables connect an antenna
(either an antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna) to the
ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN connector. Next, connect the
other supplied RF antenna cable to connect an antenna
to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector. Lastly, connect
the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT
connector.
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OUT
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CONTROL
5V
30 mA
ANTENNA
OUT
To antenna input
TV
We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for
better broadcast picture quality.
If, however, you want to use an indoor antenna, use one
with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA and set Aerial
Power to On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 138).
49
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 50 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
02
Connections
Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows
you to watch and record TV programmes, and play discs.
Other types of connections are explained starting on the
following page.
Important
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your VCR.
Tip
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied).
If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART
connection, and you want to use the supplied audio/
video cable, see Basic connections on page 10.
• The AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary
(composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo
analog audio. The AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video
input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out
and AV2/L1 In on page 140 for how to setup these
options.
• Before making or changing any rear panel
connections, make sure that all components are
switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV
tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing
on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is
in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see
Power Save on page 137).
Using the S-video or component
video output
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your
TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.
1
To component video input
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
To antenna input
From antenna output
To video input
VCR
To audio input
From SCART AV
connector
To recorder's
antenna input
2
TV
3
1
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
COAXIAL
INPUT 3
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
OUTPUT
OUT
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CONTROL
5V
30 mA
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OUT
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CONTROL
5V
30 mA
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AV1 (RGB) - TV
2
To SCART AV
connector
TV
1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 49 for details.
• If you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup, connect
it before the recorder (i.e., between the antenna wall
outlet and the antenna input on the recorder).
50
En
1 Connect the S-video or component video output
to a similar input on your TV.
For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not
supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an Svideo input on your TV.
For a component video connection, use a component
video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV.
See also Component Video Out on page 139 for how to set
up the component video output for use with a progressive
scan-compatible TV.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 51 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Connections
2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
02
1
Satellite dish/
antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
To antenna input
From antenna output
Cable/Satellite
receiver
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver
If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built-in
decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown
on this page.1 If you are using a separate decoder box for
your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions
on the next page.
3
To recorder's
antenna input
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
From SCART AV
connector
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
4
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
COAXIAL
HDMI OUT
OUTPUT
OUT
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CONTROL
5V
30 mA
AV1 (RGB) - TV
Using the setup on this page you can:
2
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box,
satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.
• Change channels and set timer recordings on the
external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system
(via the G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).
To SCART AV
connector
TV
Important
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or other component.
Always connect each component directly to your TV
or AV amplifier/receiver.
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 49 for more on RF
antenna connections, including from this recorder to
your TV.
• When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a
timer recording from an external receiver, make sure
that the external receiver is switched on.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your cable box/satellite receiver.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
4 Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™
jack.
This enables you to control the tuner in the external
receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system.
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so
that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite receiver will
pick up the control signals (see diagram).
O
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
IN
OUTPUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CONTROL
G-LINK cable
Note
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections.
51
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 52 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
02
Connections
See the manual that came with your cable/satellite
receiver if you’re not sure where the IR receiver is on the
front panel. Alternatively, experiment with the remote
control, operating it from very close range until you find
the place where the receiver responds.
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV
tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing
on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is
in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see
Power Save on page 137).
SCART AV
connection
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
2
To antenna input
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
From SCART AV
connector
Decoder
3
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OUT
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CONTROL
5V
30 mA
AV1 (RGB) - TV
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
4
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your
satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on
this page. See above for how to connect the G-LINK™
cable.
To SCART AV
connector
Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this
recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating
to pay TV services), is only viewable when this
recorder is off (in standby).
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder,
the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be
switched on during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV programme and
record another using this setup.
TV
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV connector on this recorder.
4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV
AV connector to your TV.
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and
your TV as shown on this page.1
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record scrambled channels received using the
recorder’s built-in analog TV tuner.
Note
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 140).
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 139).
52
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 53 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Connections
02
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR,
satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each
component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/
receiver.
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on
an HDMI-compatible display.
HDMI
To HDMI
IN
input
Decoder
From SCART AV
connector
HDMI-compatible display
3
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
ANTENNA R
IN
AUDIO
L
HDMI
OUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT 3
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA R
IN
COAXIAL
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CONTROL
5V
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
OUT
30 mA
INPUT 3
AC IN
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
G-LINK
AV1 (RGB) - TV
IN
OUT
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)
IN
HDMI OUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OUT
PB
Y
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CONTROL
5V
30 mA
2
To SCART AV
connector
TV
1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 49 for details.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped1 monitor or
display2, you can connect it to this recorder using an
HDMI cable (not supplied).
The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be
face down for correct alignment with the connector
on the recorder.
When connected to an HDMI component or HDCPcompatible DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights.
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however
settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output
(only available when an HDMI device is connected) on
page 144 for more information. Note that the HDMI
settings remain in effect until you change them, or
connect a new HDMI component.
Important
• An HDMI connection can only be made with DVIequipped components compatible with both DVI and
High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP).
If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will
need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP
connection, however, does not support audio.
Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit 2-channel
linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and
MPEG audio bitstream.
• If your connected component is only compatible with
Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS
audio is not output).
Note
1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL
(720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.
53
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 54 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
02
Connections
• If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma display,
please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to
the supplied manual for more on this).
About HDMI
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• Alternatively, you can use the AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input
and output with just one SCART cable.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes,
and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide
the technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or
camcorder.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigabits
per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several
cables and connectors), and communication between
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
• When connecting an external AV source that only
supports monaural sound, only insert the left (white)
audio jack to this device. Doing so will allow the same
sound track to be recorded to both channels. You
must connect to the INPUT 2 jack on the front panel.
Connecting a DV camcorder
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
licensing LLC.
You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with
DV output to the front panel DV IN jack.
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder input.
Important
Connecting other AV sources
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or DVHS video decks.
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
A.TV
STANDBY/ON
A.TV
D.TV
PLTV
DivX
D.TV
PLTV
DivX
COPY
HDMI
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
COPY
DV IN
COMMON INTERFACE
USB
DV IN
INPUT 2
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
A.TV/D.TV
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
HDMI
CH
STANDBY/ON
COMMON INTERFACE
USB
INPUT 2
CH
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
A.TV/D.TV
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
DV
IN
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
(Front panel)
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
(Rear panel)
From DV output
DV camcorder
1
2
To audio/video input
Analog camcorder
From audio/video output
VCR
1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
or camcorder.
54
En
• Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV
IN jack of this recorder.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 55 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Connections
02
Using a USB hub
Connecting a USB device
• Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/or 2.0.
Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can
connect USB devices such as digital cameras, printers,
keyboards and PCs. Please also see the instructions that
came with the device you want to connect before using.
• Use an independently powered hub (bus powered
hubs may not work reliably).
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
A.TV
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
D.TV
PLTV
DivX
COPY
HDMI
COMMON INTERFACE
USB
INPUT 2
CH
USB
(Type B)
• In the event of unreliable operation with the hub, we
recommend plugging the device directly into the
recorder’s USB port.
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
A.TV/D.TV
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
USB
(Type A)
• If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for
the devices connected, communication can become
unreliable. In this case, disconnect one or more
devices then perform a USB restart. (See Restart USB
Device on page 145.)
USB
USB
• Operation may become unreliable if too many
devices are connected to the hub. In this case, try
unplugging some devices.
Digital Camera
PictBridge-compatible
Printer
Using a USB printer
• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.
Keyboard
PC
Using a USB keyboard
• Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2USB adapter.
Important
• Some USB devices may not work with this recorder.
• When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the
power is turned off on both the PC and this unit when
you connect them via USB.
• We recommend connecting USB devices when this
recorder is switched off (in standby).
JPEG file storage devices
• Digital still camera
• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
Using a PC
• Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB
to copy WMA and MP3 files. For more information,
see Connect PC on page 121. To use Connect PC with
this device, your PC must run either the Windows XP
Home Edition (SP2) or Windows XP Professional
(SP2) operating system and be able to run Windows
Media Player 10. Even if your PC can run Windows
Media Player 10, we cannot guarantee that it will
function properly with this device. For more details
see the ‘Help’ section of Windows Media Player 10.
• USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this
recorder may not recognize it.
Plugging in
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to
transfer up to a maximum of 4000 files.
• Use the supplied power cable to connect this
recorder to a power outlet.
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.
WMA/MP3 file storage devices
• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
• USB memory
• PC (Use Connect PC function)
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this
recorder may not recognize it.
Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used,
the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To
read another card, remove all the cards and insert the
card to be read again.
55
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 56 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Getting started
03
Chapter 3
Getting started
Switching on and setting up
4
ENTER
Start the Setup Navigator.
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output.
k Setting
t Line Complete
System this setup before you
start using your recorder.
er Save
Start
P
p Navigator Cancel
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
recorder.
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
RECORDER
Switch on the recorder.
2
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 137).
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
ENTER
5
Select an Aerial Power setting1 for the
built-in digital tuner.
• On: power is always supplied to the connected aerial,
whether the recorder is on or in standby.
• Auto: power is only supplied when this recorder is on.
• Off: power is never supplied to the aerial.
ENTER
ENTER
3
Choose a language (then press ENTER).
Initial Setup
Basic
Language
Clock Setting
Tuner
Input Line System
Video In/ O ut
Pow er Save
Audio In
HELPp
Audio O ut
Setup N avig ator
Language
Re cording
Playback
6
Select ‘Auto Scan’ to start scanning for
D.TV channels.
• Select Do not set if you want to skip D.TV channel
setup (because they have already been set up, for
example), then skip to step 8 below.
ENTER
7
Select your country.
The recorder starts scanning for new channels. After the
scan is complete the recorder will let you know how many
new channels were found.
• The country setting will apply to both the digital and
analog TV tuners.
• The clock will also be set automatically here if D.TV
channels are found.
• If no new channels were found a message appears
asking if you want to scan again. Check the aerial
connection before selecting Yes. (If you select No,
skip to step 8 below.)
Note
1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off), check that the antenna is properly connected and
that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again.
56
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 57 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Getting started
03
•
ENTER
8
Select the analog TV (A.TV) Auto
Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or ‘Download from
TV’), or ‘Do not set’.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
k Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Line System
er Save
English
Auto
Scan
P
Download from TV
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the programme. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
k Setting
Auto Clock Setting
p Navigator Do not Set
Line System
Date
er Save
Time
P
• Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup
(because they have already been set up, for example).
–– / –– / ––––
–– : ––
p Navigator
Clock Set CH
Pr 1
Start
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if
this recorder is connected to your TV using a fullywired 21-pin SCART cable via the AV1 (RGB)-TV
connector, and if your TV supports this function
(check your TV’s instruction manual for more details).
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed.
k Setting
Auto Clock Setting
Line System
Date
er Save
Time
P
MON 01 / 01 / 2007
11 : 20
ENTER
•
p Navigator
Clock Set CH
Select your country.
Pr 1
Start
Next
k Setting
Country Selection
t Line System
er Save
Country
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN/EXIT to go back to the previous screen and
select Manual.
UK
P
• Auto-tuning channels
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
Tuning
•
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually.
Use the / buttons to set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
32/99
Cancel
• Downloading channels from your TV
Use the Download from TV option to download all the
channels that your TV is tuned to.
1/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Line System
Time Zone
er Save
England
London
P
Downloading
Pr 5
32/99
Cancel
p Navigator
Summer Time
Off
Press then use the / buttons to select ‘On’
or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.
Select On if you are currently using summer time.
1/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
ENTER
9
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting,
or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually.
If the clock was already set from a D.TV channel in step 6,
this step is skipped.
Line System
Time Zone
er Save
England
London
P
p Navigator
Summer Time
On
k Setting
Clock Setting
Line System
er Save
Auto
P
Manual
57
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 58 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
03
Getting started
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
2/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Line
System
Date
er Save
13 ENTER Press to continue after reading the HDD
caution.
k Setting
In the event of HDD failure, recordings may
be lost or normal playback/recording may
Line
not System
be possible.
er Save
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD
failure, we recommend to use the HDD only
as temporary storage media.
p Navigator
MON 01 / 01 / 2007
P
Time
p Navigator
00 : 00
Time Zone
England
London
Summer Time
On
P
Please copy recordings you want to keep
to recordable DVD.
Press ENTER to continue.
• Use the / buttons to change the value in the
highlighted field.
• Use the / buttons to move from one field to
another.
ENTER
14
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup
Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
k Setting
• You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup
Navigator by pressing RETURN/EXIT.
Setup is complete!
Line System
er Save
Finish Setup
p Navigator
Go Back
ENTER
10
Select the EPG (Electronic Programme
Guide) type to use.
• GUIDE Plus+: Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG
(see also Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on
page 59 and Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic
programme guide on page 62).
• Digital EPG: Use the SI EPG (programme information
broadcast together with digital channels).
• If no channels were found when scanning for digital
TV channels then this screen does not appear and
the EPG is set according to the country set in step 7
above.
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
• If there are blank channels with no station, you can
set these to skip using the manual channel setting.
See Manual CH Setting on page 139.
For users receiving digital broadcast
services
This unit can set its internal clock automatically from
digital broadcasts. However, depending on the
broadcaster, the clock information received may not be
accurate.
Use the following procedure (while the recorder is not
recording) to set the clock manually.
ENTER
11
Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’
or ‘Standard (4:3)’.
1
HOME MENU
Press HOME MENU.
k Setting
TV Screen Size
Line System
er Save
Wide (16:9)
P
Standard (4:3)
p Navigator
ENTER
2
Setting’.
3
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Basic’ > ‘Clock
Highlight the time setting.
ENTER
Select whether or not your TV is
12
compatible with progressive scan video.
k Setting
Progressive
4 ENTER Press to display the manual clock setting
screen.
5
Set the correct time.
Line System
er Save
Compatible
P
Not Compatible
p Navigator Don't Know
• This screen is not displayed when an HDMI signal is
being output.
58
En
Return to automatic clock setting
• To return to the automatic clock setting, follow the
instructions for ‘Replace Channels’ (page 137).
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 59 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Getting started
03
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system
This section is only applicable if you chose to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type in step 10 of the
Setup Navigator above.
ENTER
2
Highlight ‘Postal Code’.
The GUIDE Plus+® system is a free, interactive onscreen television programming guide. The system offers
programme listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more.
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is
important that you set the language and country
correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have
performed a scan for available channels, as these are all
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things
are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see
Switching on and setting up on page 56).
TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In
order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once
this is done, all future updates are automatic.
1
GUIDE
SETUP
1
/ST–
4
F.S.SURR
7
3
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
ADVANCED
0
9
ENTER
Enter your postal code.
Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu.
The system uses your postal code to identify which TV
listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it
is important that you enter it correctly.
The language and country settings are already set to
whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.
59
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 60 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
03
Getting started
4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a
satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable,
complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.
5 Identify the host channel for your country.
The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+
system is distributed throughout Europe by selected
broadcasters called host channels. It is important that
the host (analog) channel for your country is correctly
identified in order to receive listings information (EPG
download).
Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup:
A If you are not using an external receiver, this
recorder will automatically scan all channels for the
host channel:
• Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave
it switched on).
B If you are using an external receiver, you need to
identify the host channel from the table below:
• See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on
page 51 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable.
• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press
ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use
External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in
2 and 3 if you need to.)
After pressing ENTER:
• Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or
Satellite).
• Select your provider (if applicable).
• Select the brand of your external receiver.
• Identify which input your external receiver is
connected to.
After completing these steps the recorder will try and
communicate with your external receiver and change the
channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was
successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.
If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE
Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your
external receiver. If none of the codes changes the
channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the
host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and
leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby;
it will wake up automatically and download new codes
from the host channel. The next day, try this setup
process again:
• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
• Press to highlight the Menu bar, then use to
reach the Setup area and select Setup.
• Continue setting up from the start of this step again.
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the GLINK controller, please call customer support and report
the brand and model of your external receiver.
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on
page 71.
60
En
Country/
Region
Host channels Comments
Austria
Eurosport
Belgium
RTL-TVI
France
Canal+
Germany
Eurosport
Italy
MTV
Netherlands
Eurosport
Spain
Tele 5
Switzerland
Eurosport
UK
ITV, Eurosport
Analog only
Analog only
Analog only
ITV is analog only. Use Eurosport
if you are a SKY subscriber and
you no longer have an analog
terrestrial antenna.
• Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host
channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in
standby overnight.
C If you use both an external receiver and this
recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for
setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is
unsuccessful try the external receiver method.
About EPG download
• EPG data can only be received when the recorder is
in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore,
please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an
external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is
downloading.
• If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see
the above table) then you won’t be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the
postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, set the postal code again.)
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 61 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Getting started
03
• For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+
system will need to know how it is received (the
source) and on which programme number. The
source may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or
an external receiver. The programme number is the
number on which the channel can be found on its
receiving device/source. The entry in the Editor
screen must match this number for correct
recording of that channel.
If digital broadcasts start in your area, please set the
EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to
Digital EPG.
• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you
live, you can still set VIDEO Plus+ recordings and
manual recordings — see Setting a manual recording
on page 69.
• The front panel display shows EPG when receiving
data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG
download, the download is cancelled.
• The above is especially important for the ‘host
channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is
always switched ON.
• EPG data may be received several times a day. All
updates are automatic.
• When downloading EPG data, the recorder may
sound as though it is on. This is normal.
SETUP
1
/ST–
4
F.S.SURR
7
2
Checking the downloaded data the
following day
1
GUIDE
Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
ADVANCED
0
9
Change the programme numbers as you
like.
Changing the programme numbers allows you to decide
the order in which the channels change when stepping
through them sequentially. You can do this to group
certain channels together, for example.
Name
BBC1
BBC2
ITV
CH4
CH5
BBC3
ITV2
E4
UKGOL
You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV
listings information. Use the / buttons to review the
list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that
there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the
Editor screen:
On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Source
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Prog. No.
001
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
3 When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button
(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.
• You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE
Plus+ system in the following chapter.
• Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.
• Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of
the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that
are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that
are OFF are hidden. Use the /// buttons to
move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as
necessary.
61
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 62 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
04
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
Chapter 4
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic
programme guide
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select
setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup
menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+.
The GUIDE Plus+ system
The GUIDE Plus+® system* is a free, interactive onscreen television programming guide.1 The system
provides programme listings for all major channels, onetouch recording, searching by genre, recommendations
according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+
system is a convenient way to find out what’s on right
now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre.
The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to
automatically set your viewing and recording selections
quickly and easily.
In order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up
the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 59 before
proceeding.
* GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject of various international
patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to,
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
Legal Notice
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAMME SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system
All the various features and areas are colour-coded for
ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of
some setup screens) have the following common
elements:
3
1
5
2
62
6
1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching
the current programme while using the GUIDE
Plus+ system.
2 Information panels – Display programme
promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+
system.
3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action buttons change
function depending on the area.
4 Information box – Shows short programme
descriptions or help menus.
5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next
seven days by channel and time.
Note
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 137).
En
4
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 63 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
04
GUIDE Plus+ navigation
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons
you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Key
What it does
REC
Press to set or cancel One Button
Recording.
GUIDE
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen
(also use to exit).
///
Use to navigate screens (highlight an
item).
1
Highlight a programme title.
RED, GREEN,
Action buttons that change functionality
YELLOW, BLUE depending on the Area.
MENU
Press to jump directly to the Menu bar.
TIMER REC
Press to go directly to the Schedule area.
INFO
Press to display extended information for
the current programme.
ENTER
Press to confirm a selection or to leave
the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
Number
buttons
Use for numeric entry.
• You can also use the REC button to set the
recording.
PREV/
NEXT
Press to select the previous/next page of
information (in the grid, for example).
• You can review the shows you have set to record in
the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on
page 67).
/
Press to select the previous/next day.
2 Press the RED Action button (Record).
The programme is now set for recording. When the
programme is due to start, the recorder will switch to the
correct channel and start recording1.
Lock/Unlock video window
One-Button-Record
The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you
can highlight a programme title, including from the Grid,
after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV
area.
The programme name, date, channel, recording start
and end times are all set automatically when you set a
timer recording using One-Button-Record.
If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before
the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled
recording on page 67).
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel
you were watching remains visible in the video window.
The date stamp above the window lets you know the
channel, date and time.
The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as
indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video
window. When locked, the video window always shows
the channel you were previously watching as you move
up and down through the listings grid.
If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as
you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that
channel is shown in the video window.
Note
1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the programme
broadcast schedules.
63
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 64 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
04
The Grid Area
1
Highlight a channel logo.
The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE
Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when
you press GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next
seven days, starting with the current day.
When you highlight a programme in the Grid, you can
see information about it in the Information Box, including
title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there
is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there
is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button
to see it.
In some countries, you can also see a rating for a
particular programme (mostly movies). These ratings are
provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.
Channel logos are displayed to the left of programme
titles.
From the Grid Area you can:
• View and scroll through programme listings
2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock).
The padlock icon above the video window becomes
unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your
current TV viewing session.
• Read programme synopses
If you want to lock the video window again, follow the
same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as
Lock.
• Lock or unlock the video window
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing1
• Set a programme to record
• Access Information panels
Browsing the Grid
Channel mosaic screen
Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:
You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid
Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic
of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button.
Select the channel icon you want using the cursor
buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous
screen on that channel.
/// (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid
PREV/ NEXT – Previous / next page
/ – Previous / next day
BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in
the Grid
ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE
Plus+ system and start watching the programme
Areas
The GUIDE Plus+® system consists of seven Areas. All
Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.
• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area.
Displays TV listings information for the next seven
days by time and channel.
• Search – Search for TV programmes by category
(e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword.
• My TV – Set up a profile and receive
recommendations according to your preferences.
• Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings.
The Search Area
From the Search Area you can:
• Search by category
• Search by subcategory
• Search by keyword
• Read programme synopses
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing
• Set a programme to record
• Access Information panels
• Info – Area for additional information, such as
weather (not available in all regions).
• Editor – Change channel settings.
• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+® system.
Note
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel.
This is normal.
64
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 65 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
Searching
Using My Choice keywords for a search
You can search for programmes by category,
subcategory or by keyword (My Choice). Categories for
searching include Movies (purple), Sport (green),
Children (blue) and Others (teal). In some countries there
is a further subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’.
These are programmes recommended by a local partner,
such as a TV magazine.
In addition to the standard categories, you can also set
your own keywords.
1
Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar.
2
Select a category and a subcategory.
1
2
04
Access My Choice.
Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword.
ENTER
3
Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.
• If you choose All as the subcategory, all programmes
in the category you selected will show up in the
search results.
3 ENTER Start the search.
The search results are shown sorted by time and date.
• If no search results are displayed, it means there are
no programmes for the current day that match your
search criteria.
When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to
exit and continue.
4
ENTER
Start the keyword search.
• You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
• When you have set more than two keywords, an All
subcategory automatically appears which allows you
to search for all your keywords.
65
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 66 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
04
My TV Area
The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile. You
can define a profile by channels, themes and/or keywords.
As soon as a personal profile has been set, the GUIDE
Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings for the
next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a
list of programmes matching your profile appears.
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.
4 To add a category to your profile, highlight
‘Categories’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
From the My TV Area you can:
• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword
• Edit and delete profiles
• Read programme synopses
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing
• Set a programme to record
• Access Information panels
Setting up a profile
You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16
channels, four categories and 16 keywords.
1
Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.
Channels is now highlighted.
3 To add a channel to your profile, press the
YELLOW Action button.
Select a category from the Search Area categories and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four categories.
5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight
‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
6
Press ENTER to activate your profile.
• You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5.
• You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
66
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 67 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
The Schedule Area
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and
delete scheduled (timer) recordings.
04
Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the
RED Action button to go back.
4
Enter a name for the scheduled recording.
From the Schedule Area you can:
• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording
• Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+ recording
• Set, edit or delete a manual recording
Editing a scheduled recording
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or
delete it if you no longer require it1.
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard.
After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action
button to continue.
5
Highlight the right recording tile.
6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change
the recording quality.
• If you only want to edit the recording quality,
frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip
to step 5 below.
2
Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).
3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the
recording date, start time, end time and channel.
Select from AUTO2, XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or a manual
recording mode (see Manual Recording on page 142 and
Manual recording modes on page 151).
Use the / buttons or the number buttons to edit.
Note
1 See About timer recordings on page 86 for more information about scheduled recordings.
2 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
67
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 68 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
04
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to
change the recording frequency.
9
Press to access the extended recording options.
• If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use
the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one.
Select from the various options for one-time, daily and
weekly recordings.
• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra
time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or
VPS/PDC2 (V–P)).
8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to
select the recording destination.
• Press to display the standard recording options
again.
Deleting a scheduled recording
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace
Recording)1.
• Auto Replace Recording is only available as an
option with regular daily or weekly recordings.
2 Press the RED Action button (Delete).
The scheduled event is deleted.
Note
1 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 142) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for
DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased.
2 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.
68
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 69 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
Setting a VIDEO Plus+® recording
Setting a manual recording
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
2
Press the RED Action button (VIDEO Plus+).
2
Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).
3 Use the number buttons to enter a PlusCode
programming number.
04
3 Use the number and /// buttons to enter
the recording date, then press the GREEN Action
button (Next).
Please enter the PlusCode programming number and press
ENTER to confirm.
• If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE
Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel
number. Follow the on-screen display to do this.
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
4 In the same way, enter the recording start time,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
5 Enter the recording end time in the same way,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
69
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 70 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
04
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel
number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next)
to confirm.
D.TV
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
Name
BBC1
BBC2
ITV
CH4
CH5
BBC3
ITV2
E4
UKGOL
001
On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Source
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Prog. No.
001
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you
want to switch on or off.
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button
(Mosaic) and use the /// buttons to select a
channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER.
3 Press the RED Action button to switch the
channel on or off.
Changing the source and programme number
The Info Area
This area is reserved for additional information such as
news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and
varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in
all countries/regions.)
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
The Editor Area
Name
BBC1
BBC2
ITV
CH4
CH5
BBC3
ITV2
E4
UKGOL
The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage
your channels. Any changes you make here will affect
what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is
mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make any manual changes as necessary.
You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become
available in your area, or if you change from cable to
satellite, say, or move house.
From the Editor Area you can:
• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel
on/off)
• Select a channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1,
Ext. Rec. 2, etc.)
• Enter a channel programme number
Switching a channel on/off
You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the
Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor
Area.
On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Source
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Ext. Rec. 1
D. TV
D. TV
D. TV
Prog. No.
001
002
003
004
005
007
006
014
017
2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel
you want to make a change to.
3 Press the RED Action button to change the
channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter
a programme number.
Each press of the RED Action button changes the
channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a
programme number, use the number buttons to enter a
programme number then press ENTER (When set to
A.TV or D.TV, make sure that the programme number
matches the preset number of this recorder for what you
want to record).
The Setup Area
The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+
system for your particular region, TV reception
conditions, and so on.
70
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 71 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup
1
Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.
Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen.
Basic Setup
04
You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back
to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that
resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data.
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list
please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at:
www.europe.guideplus.com
Host Channel Setup
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
FAQ
• When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not
get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?
2
Highlight the part you want to change.
There could be several reasons why your external
receiver could not be controlled.
– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that
the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK
connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in
front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR
receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a
cable box or satellite receiver on page 51.
You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code1
and the External Receiver settings.
3
Press ENTER to confirm.
Manual Host Channel setup
The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your
Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby
for the first time. See the table on page 60 for a list of all
the European Host Channels.
If you know your Host Channel details (source and
programme number) or if the automatic identification
did not provide the expected result, you can identify your
Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in
the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV.
Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external
receiver) and enter the respective programme number
(e.g., if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your
Host Channel, enter 9 as the programme number). When
you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE
Plus+ system will complete the Host Channel setup.
– The code that is listed under your brand could be
wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under
satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and
choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or
terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE
Plus+ system can change channels on your external
receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process,
choosing different reception and external receiver
combinations until you have tried all the codes for
your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE
Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on
how to receive new codes overnight.
– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly
data downloads frequently include new codes for
controlling external receivers. Please tune your
external receiver to your local host channel and leave
it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The
next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+
setup again to see if your external receiver can now
be controlled.
– The external receiver that you use is currently not
supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on
overnight, and doing the Reception and External
Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please
call Customer Support to report your brand and
model.
Note
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours.
71
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 72 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
04
Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide
• My external receiver was successfully setup. However
I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has
to change to a channel with a three-digit programme
number in the external receiver’s preset, it does not
work. It looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only
send two digits.
With the number of channels increasing, the number
of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use
only two digits, newer boxes require up to four. It is
possible that you selected an older code for your
brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area,
select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your
brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen
question about whether the receiver has changed to
a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent
a different code). Try all the different codes until your
GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external
receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to
receive new codes overnight.
• I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or
analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with
external receiver. What should I do to receive data for
the GUIDE Plus+ system?
You can try to receive your host channel through your
new reception method. If you have problems to
receive data we recommend that you keep your
analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive
data this way. It is important that you identify your
host channel correctly in the Editor Area.
• After I performed the initial set-up I found that the lineup for all the channels received via the external set top
box is incorrect. How do I correct this?
You can change the line-up in the editor according to
your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the
channels that you would like to change. Change the
source and preset number according to your
preferences.
• I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have
a blank EPG what is going wrong?
There are several possibilities:
– Connections are wrong. See Connections on
page 48 to double check everything.
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed
incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+® system on page 59).
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has
not been connected for enough time to receive the TV
listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.
– For external receiver users only: The connections
and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not
tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of
host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE
Plus+® system on page 59) and leave the recorder
in standby and the external receiver on overnight
tuned to the correct host channel.
– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+
system is not yet available. Check the list of countries
to see if you are in a region that is supported.
• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action
button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong
channel.
If the channel to be recorded is received via the
external receiver first make sure that the external
receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor
Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is
correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the
source and programme number of the channel that
you wanted to record. Change the source and preset
numbers if incorrect.
If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner
(the A.TV or D.TV setting), make sure that the
programme number is the same as the preset
number set on this recorder. If they are different, go
to the Editor Area and change the programme
number to match the recorder’s preset number.
• The TV listings information doesn’t update.
The latest TV listings information is automatically
downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only
happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder
is left on, it will not download. When not using the
recorder, please switch it into standby.
Data downloads can take several hours. The front
panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you
switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the
download will be cancelled.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area,
but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a
while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop
this from happening?
If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your
area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+®
system on page 59). When the GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, please set the postal code again.
• The automatic Host Channel search failed or the
GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host
Channel for my region.
You can identify your Host Channel manually. See
Manual Host Channel setup on page 71 for how to do
this.
72
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 73 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
05
Chapter 5
Using the digital electronic
programme guide
• The general programme list may show sections
whose bottom right corners have been folded. This
indicates that other programmes have been
scheduled for that period. To view the title of such a
programme and related information, highlight a
folded section, and then press /.
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select
setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup
menu) is set to Digital EPG.
The Digital EPG system
The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV
programmes and detailed information about individual
programmes. It also allows you easily to select and tune
to a particular programme.1
The Digital EPG screen consists of programme
Information, Channel List and General Programme List.
This section describes information displayed in the
schedule and information windows.
Note that the recorder’s clock must be set to the correct
time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is
displayed.
Programme information
D007
1
Channel number
2
Station name
3
Programme title
4
Appear when other programmes have been
scheduled for the same period
5
Programme schedule
6
Programme genre
General Programme List
D007
1
Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled
forward or backward
2
Time schedule
3
Channel list
4
Highlights the currently selected channel
5
Indicates the programme set for recording
6
Appears when other programmes (often short ones)
have been scheduled for the same period
7
Programme title
8
Time dividers
Note
1 EPG information is only viewable for D.TV programmes that provide EPG information.
73
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 74 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
05
• To quit the display of detailed information, press
INFO again (or RETURN/EXIT).
Using the Digital EPG
Using the Digital EPG you can check the schedule of
digital TV programmes, view information about desired
programmes, and/or select programmes.
D007
************
13:40 - 14:05
*************
**************************
GUIDE
1
Press to display the Digital EPG screen.
The EPG screen updates automatically if the EPG data is
acquired successfully. If not, the Digital EPG screen
shows a blank image.
More...
2
Select a TV programme.
4
GUIDE
Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.
D007
Setting timer programmes
Using the Digital EPG, it’s easy to set digital TV
programmes for recording2.
1
GUIDE
Press to display the Digital EPG screen.
ENTER
• Press PREV/ NEXT to skip to the next or
previous channel list page.
• Information about the selected programme appears
in the information window.1
2
Select a programme.
D007
• To watch a programme currently on air, select the
programme (then press ENTER).
• You can check information about programmes
scheduled up to one week ahead, depending on
conditions.
• Depending on conditions, it may take some time to
acquire EPG data.
INFO
3
Press to view more information about the
selected programme.
Detailed information appears in the schedule window.
If the screen contains further information, More ... is
displayed.
• Select a programme currently on-air: press ENTER to
close the Digital EPG screen and watch the channel
immediately, or press RED to set the programme for
recording immediately.
• Select a programme not yet started then press
ENTER or RED to set the programme for recording.
Note
1 The general programme list does not show programmes that have already finished.
2 For more information on timer programmes, see About timer recordings on page 86.
74
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 75 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
3 Enter the timer recording settings.
Use the / buttons to select a field; use the /
buttons to change the value1.
Timer Programme Set
Manhattan Open Tennis
CH
Date
D.TV003
Start
SUN 1/4
Detailed Settings
Record To
Recording Mode
VPS/PDC
Auto Replace Rec.
Genre
Stop
18:00
19:00
Extend
Off
Enter Details
HDD
XP
----------No Category
Store Programme
Set Detailed
Set Title Name
Cancel
VPS/PDC 0/8
• CH – Choose a channel (Pr 1 to Pr 99 for analog
channels and available digital channels (excluding
skip channels)), or one of the external inputs from
which to record.
• Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or
select a daily or weekly programme.
Recording Mode – Select from AUTO3, XP, SP, LP, EP,
SLP, SEP (See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 83). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also
select the LPCM setting, XP+ or MN (press ENTER then
use the / buttons to select the level).
VPS/PDC4 – Choose whether or not to use VPS/PDC
when making timer recordings of analog programmes
(see About timer recordings on page 86).
Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases the previous
daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded.
Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD recording only).
EPG Link5 (UK only) – Choose whether or not to have this
device automatically record scheduled programmes
from the Digital EPG even if the times in which they are
broadcast change.
Series Recording6 (UK only) – Choose whether or not to
record all programmes from a series when you make a
recording from the Digital EPG (for HDD recordings only).
• Start – Set the recording start time.
5 After entering all the timer recording information,
highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press ENTER.
A red clock icon appears for the programme.
• Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length
of a timer recording is 24 hours).
6
• Extend – Extend the end time of the timer recording
(select Off, 10, 20 or 30 mins.)
4 If you want to change the recording mode,
recording destination, etc., select ‘Set Detailed’.
In this area you can set:
05
GUIDE
Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.
Tip
• To enter a title name for the timer recording in
advance, select Set Title Name and follow the onscreen display.
Record to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD
for DVD recording2.
Note
1 You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On (see below).
2 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 142) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for
DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased.
3 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
4 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.
5 • You cannot set an EPG Link when recording mode is set to AUTO.
• You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On.
• When you have EPG Link set to On and you set a timer recording for a programme that is divided into multiple parts, all parts of that
icon, with
programme are recorded automatically. In the programme list, the earliest part of the programme to be recorded has a red
successive parts indicated by a gray
icon. Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as divided
programmes.
6 • In the programme list, the earliest programme to be recorded has a red
icon, with successive programmes indicated by a gray
icon.
• There is a limit to the number of programmes you can schedule to record with the Series Recording function.
• Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as part of a series.
75
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 76 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
05
Using the digital electronic programme guide
Editing a timer programme
You can change any of the settings in a timer programme
before the recording is due to start. Even if a programme
is currently being recorded, you can program a new end
time or edit its extend time parameter.
TIMER REC
1
Press to display the Timer Programme
View screen.
You can also access the Timer Programme View screen
from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording).
This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set.
Timer Programme View
SUN 25/3 15:00
Tmr Pgms 3/32
VPS/PDC 0/8
Manhattan Open Tennis
OK
SUN 25/3 18:00 – 19:00
Pr 4
OK
World Journey
MON 26/3 19:30 – 21:00
Pr 6
Flower
MON – FRI 13:30 – 14:00
Pr 8
ENTER
4
Enter the timer recording settings.
Use the / buttons to select a field; use the /
buttons to change the value. For more information on the
options available at the Timer Programme Set screen,
See Setting timer programmes on page 74.
ENTER
5
After entering all the timer recording
information, highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press
ENTER.
The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The
timer programme you just input appears in the list. The
rightmost column shows various timer recording status
messages:
• OK – Can be recorded.
Until 20/4
• Time Over – Not enough space on the HDD (the
recording won’t finish).
New Input
• Over 12h – Recording time of over 12 hours set
(when recording to the HDD the recording will be
split into two titles).
HDD Remain
DVD Remain
59h59m(SP)
1h59m(SP)
• Overlap – Two timer programmes partially or
completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take
priority.
• Each row is for one timer recording programme, with
the date and time information, channel, recording
mode, DVD or HDD and recording status.
• Until ... (eg., Until 13/8) – For a regular recording,
the last programme that could be recorded is shown.
• The amount of free space available on the HDD and
the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown
towards the bottom of the screen.
• Data Over – Can’t record because the disc
management area of the disc is full.
• In the upper-right corner, the number of timer
programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms.
• Cancel Once – A regular timer programme is set to
skip.
• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record.
• If there are more than five timer programmes already
set, press NEXT to switch page (go back using
the PREV button).
• Title Over – Can’t record because there is already
the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999;
DVD: 99).
• You can also delete a timer programme before it’s
started (before the recorder enters timer recording
standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR. See
also Deleting a timer programme on page 77.
• Recording – The programme is currently recording.
• Standby – The recorder is in timer recording standby.
• Valid Until ... (eg., Valid Until 13/8) (UK only) – When
you have set to make a series recording of a
programme that has no new scheduled broadcasts,
the date displayed indicates the last day until which
the scheduled programme settings remain valid. (If
the programme is not broadcast for over 13 weeks, its
settings are automatically deleted.)
2
Highlight the timer programme you
want to change.
If you want to set a new timer programme, select ‘New
Input’ and skip to step 4.
• No Broadcast (UK only) – Displays when a
programme for which you had the EPG Link set to On
does not record because the date of the scheduled
recording has already passed.
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Modify’ from the
command menu panel.
Alternatively, press ENTER.
The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which
you can edit the settings.
76
En
• nothing displayed – Another timer recording or
copying is in progress.
6
HOME MENU
Press to exit the timer recording screen.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 77 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
05
Note
ENTER
• If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no
recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded
doesn’t have enough free space for the complete
recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unless
you load a suitable disc before the recording actually
starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording.
(The message Can’t Rec will appear if there are
already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough
free space on the HDD for recording.)
3
Press then select ‘Cancel Once’ from
the command menu panel.
• In the timer programme list, Cancel Once appears by
the programme.
• When you have EPG Link or Series Recording set to
On, any changes in broadcast time or division of
broadcasts are automatically accommodated for and
your scheduled recordings are carried out without
any additional settings. As a result, even when you
have not scheduled programmes to record at the
same time, changes in broadcasting schedules can
cause scheduled recordings to overlap.
(UK only)
Deleting a timer programme
You can delete timer programmes you no longer need.
• You can also just press PAUSE when the timer
programme is highlighted.
Checking for alternative broadcast times
You can check to see if a programme you have scheduled
to record is airing at an alternative time slot1.
TIMER REC
1
Press TIMER REC.
2
Highlight the timer programme you
want to search.
TIMER REC
1
Press TIMER REC.
2
Highlight the timer programme you
want to erase.
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Alternate Search’
from the command menu panel.
• The search results are displayed. Choose the
programme you would like to record and press either
the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.
Searching for series
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Erase’ from the
command menu panel.
• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.
• You can also just press CLEAR when the timer
programme is highlighted.
(UK only)
You can search for broadcasts of programmes of the
same series as a programme you have scheduled to
record1.
TIMER REC
Skipping a regular timer programme
If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme,
you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled
recording.
TIMER REC
1
1
Press TIMER REC.
2
Highlight the timer programme you
want to search.
Press TIMER REC.
ENTER
2
Highlight the timer programme you
want to skip.
3
Press then select ‘Series Search’ from
the command menu panel.
• The search results are displayed. Choose the
programme you would like to record and press either
the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.
Note
1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster.
• This function may not be applicable to all programmes.
77
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 78 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the digital electronic programme guide
05
Searching for recommendations
EPG Search
(UK only)
You can search for recommended programmes
generated from the content of the programmes you have
scheduled to record1.
1 Press YELLOW when the EPG screen (Programme
List, Detailed information or Search Result) is
displayed.
TIMER REC
1
2
In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within
one week) to search in.
Press TIMER REC.
Date
2
Highlight the timer programme you
want to search.
Sun.12.Sep
Time
12:00
Genre
Select
0/16
ENTER
3
Press then select ‘Recommendation
Search’ from the command menu panel.
The search results are displayed. Choose the programme
you would like to record and press either the RED button
or ENTER to schedule a recording.
Other useful EPG functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search
Cancel
3
In the ‘Time’ field select the time of day
(0:00 to 23:00) to search in.
EPG Jump
1 Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen
(Programme List, Detailed information or Search
Result) is displayed.
4
In the ‘Genre’ field, select the genre to
search for.
You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER
after each genre.
2
In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within
one week) to jump to.
ENTER
5
Date
Time
14:00
Jump
ENTER
Cancel
6
Select ‘Search’.
The results of your search are displayed.
3
In the ‘Time’ field select a time of the
day (0:00 to 23:00) to jump to.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Jump’.
The Programme List for the specified day and time is
displayed.
Note
1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster.
• This function may not be applicable to all programmes.
78
En
Select ‘OK’.
Mon.13.Sep
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 79 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
Chapter 6
Recording
About DVD recording
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R,
DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media.
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video
mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages,
and it depends on what you want to do with the recording
which mode you choose.
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,
and changing the way the video is presented.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the
total number of recordable titles remaining may not
increase.
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 146.
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can
affect playback and/or recording performance.
Please take proper care of your discs.
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs1).
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all
recording on that disc will be in that mode.
• See also Disc/content format playback compatibility
on page 43 for detailed disc compatibility information.
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording.
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the
same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however,
please note the following points:
Important
• The table below shows the maximum number of titles
recordable per disc and the maximum number of
chapters per title:
Max. titles
(per disc)
Max. chapters
(per title)
DVD-R/-RW
Video mode
99
99
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
VR mode
99
999*1
DVD+R/+RW
49
99*2
Disc type/rec. format
*1
• When the recorder switches from the first layer to the
second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode)
disc, a new title is automatically started on the new
layer.
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video
mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when
the layer is switched, recording will stop.
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc.
• You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or
finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been
recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD
recorder.
A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.
*2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.
• This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD
-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs recorded on
another recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on
another recorder are playable on this recorder but are
not recordable.
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc.
Note
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for
VR mode compatibility information.
79
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 80 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
06
Recording
About HDD recording
Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible;
you have the full choice of recording quality options,
including manual mode, and of course you can record,
erase and re-record as many times as you like.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even using the higher
quality recording modes.
Important
• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99
respectively. No more recording is possible on the
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been
reached.
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is 12 hours.
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 146)
matches the TV line system of the source you’re
recording.
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 143).
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from
HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW is
possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set
which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup
menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 140).
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,
high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW isn’t possible. However, both
channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you
can switch the audio on playback.
Recorded audio
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two
channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can
be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible).
When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality,
uncompressed Linear PCM format.
80
En
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or to the
HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode
On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording
setting (page 140) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel
to record before recording starts. In other cases, both
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and
you can switch on playback.
Restrictions on video recording
You cannot record copy-protected video using this
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs
and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material
is encountered during a recording, recording will pause
automatically and an error message will be displayed onscreen.
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to
DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/
-RW (see below).
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external
input, you can display copy control information on screen
(see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 99).
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programmes.
CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
you can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but
you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD
-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher)
discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the
HDD.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying. You are advised to check carefully what
constitutes lawful copying in the country in which you are
making a copy. Copying of copyrighted material such as
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal
exception or consented to by the rightowners.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must
be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home
and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 81 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
Using the D.TV Channel List
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners
Switching between A.TV and D.TV tuners
When in D.TV mode, you can call up the on-screen Channel
List anytime by pressing ENTER. Use the / buttons to
select a channel, then press ENTER to switch to that channel.3
D001 ************
A.TV/D.TV
D002 ************
•
Press to switch between D.TV (digital) and
A.TV (analog).
D003 ******
D004 ************
D005 ****
D006 ******
Changing channels
There are a number of ways to select analog and digital
TV channels.1 Note that you can’t change the TV channel
during playback, recording or during recording standby.
CHANNEL
•
Displaying a channel banner
A channel banner shows programme titles, start and end
times of the current programme and other channel
information. The information is updated every minute.
Smart Jog
CHANNEL
INFO
SETUP
1
/ST–
4
F.S.SURR
7
•
/TUNE+
2
SR+
3
ENTER
5
•
Press to display the channel banner for the
current channel.
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
0
Number buttons
For example, to select channel 4 (digital channel
D004), press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34 (digital
channel D034), press 3, 4, ENTER.2
• CH +/– buttons on the front panel.
• For D.TV channels only, you can also use the Channel
List — see below.
Tip
• When changing terrestrial digital broadcast
channels, channels with a low signal strength may
result in a black screen being displayed.
• For other channels, it may take a short while for the
channel picture to appear, and/or for the channel
number to appear.
• In both of the above cases, some improvement may
be possible by adjusting the antenna.
D001 ************
Now ********************
Next *************
Wed.30.Apr 12:46
11:30 - 12:00
12:00 - 12:30
• Use the / buttons to display the channel banner
for other channels. To switch to the displayed
banner’s channel, press ENTER.
• The channel banner displays the Subtitles ( ) and
Teletext/MHEG ( ) icon if they apply to the selected
channel.4
• To see more detailed channel information, press
INFO again.5
Now
************************
11:30 - 12:00
More...
Use the / buttons to display information about
previous and following programmes. Use the /
buttons to see information about other channels.
• If there is still more information to be displayed,
More ... is displayed; press the BLUE button to see
the extra information.
• To hide the channel banner, press RETURN/EXIT.
Note
1 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.
• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes.
2 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999.
3 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.
• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes.
4 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error.
5 Not all channels supply more detailed information.
81
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 82 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
Changing D.TV audio languages
AUDIO
• MAIN SUB +
Press to display the current audio
language. Press repeatedly to change it to other
available languages.
Changing D.TV subtitle languages
SUBTITLE
• MAIN SUB +
Press to display the current subtitle
language. Press repeatedly to change it to other
available languages.
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on
page 140) is set to NICAM and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
NICAM
Regular
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
NICAM A
Regular
(UK only)
Some stations bring you programmes with the MHEG
(Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group) application
encoded, letting you experience D.TV interactively.1
•
) to indicate that
+ TEXT Press to start the MHEG application. 2
MAIN
SUB
• You can also use any of the colour buttons.
A (L)
• When watching a recording made from an external
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External
Audio on page 140), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).
L
Note
(European countries except the UK.)
+ TEXT
MAIN
SUB
Press to display the Teletext.
• You can also use any of the colour buttons.
• Press the TEXT button again to hide the Teletext
screen.
R
L+R
Viewing Teletext
You can view the Teletext that comes simultaneously with
certain programmes.
B (R)
A + B (L+R)
• Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application.
•
NICAM A+B
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
Using the MHEG application
The channel banner displays an icon (
the MHEG application can be run.
NICAM B
• When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode), to DVD+R/+RW, or on the LPCM setting, only
one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In
this case, decide which language you want to record
before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording
setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 140).
Switching between TV and DVD
Changing A.TV audio channels
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
AUDIO
• MAIN SUB +
Press to change the audio type.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
During playback or when a menu is being displayed onscreen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
• MAIN
mode.
SUB
+
TV/DVD
Switch between TV mode and DVD
Note
1 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be recorded. To avoid this, quit the
application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress.
2 This function is not available when subtitle display is active.
82
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 83 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance
between picture quality and recording time.
When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual
Recording on page 142), a further option will be available
(MN1 to MN32, LPCM, or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD
recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15
Mbps) depending on what you set).
When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording
quality available. If you select XP+, the recording mode
will automatically revert to MN32.
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest
recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to
MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP.
06
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see On Screen Display on page 144) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
Basic recording from the TV
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the
channel to record, choosing whether to record to the
HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality.
HDD/DVD
1
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video
mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before
proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 89).
REC MODE
•
Press repeatedly to select the recording
quality.
• XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most
applications, gives about two hours of recording time
on a DVD.
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four
hours.
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
Select the HDD or DVD for recording.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the
recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc).
A.TV/D.TV
2
Press to switch between D.TV (digital) and
A.TV (analog).
CHANNEL
3
Select a TV channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel number, or
channel name if it’s available:
CHANNEL
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
A.TV Channel preset
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel
(For channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).
• MN1 to MN32/LPCM1/XP+2 – Manual/Linear PCM/
XP+ (available only when manual recording is on).
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
CH +/– buttons on the front panel to select the
channel number.
REC MODE
4
Set the picture quality/recording time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above
for detailed instructions.
Note
1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 140).
2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are
always copied in real time.
83
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 84 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
AUDIO
5 MAIN SUB +
If you’re recording from the A.TV
tuner, select the audio channel to record.
See Changing A.TV audio channels on page 82 for more
on this.
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the
audio channel before recording.
AUDIO
6 MAIN SUB +
If you’re recording from the D.TV
tuner, select the audio language to record.
• You may also be able to set which subtitle language
to record; use SUBTITLE to select.
• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be
changed during the recording of a digital broadcast.
REC
Start recording.
7
If you want to set a recording end time, press the REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other
operation is being performed.
Pause Live TV
HDD
The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV
programme you’re watching. When you’re ready to
resume watching, just press the PLAY button.
Setting up for Pause Live TV
You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Linkcompatible TV connected using a SCART cable (see TV
tuner setup for Pause Live TV below), or using this
recorder’s internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s
internal tuner for Pause Live TV on page 85).
TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV
To use this feature with an external TV tuner, the recorder
must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and
the AV. Link setting (page 145) should be set to This
Recorder Only.2 See also Pause Live TV on page 145 for
more on this.
In order to use Pause Live TV, make the following
connections and settings.
• Pause Live TV will not work as expected when
watching TV via an external component such as a
VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel
selected on the TV.
• To cancel the set recording time, press REC.
Important
• If you want to pause recording at any time1, press
PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording (If
recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a
new chapter is started after recording restarts).
• Pause Live TV only works with the built-in A.TV
(analog) tuner. It does not work with the D.TV tuner or
the external inputs. Make sure the Auto Channel
Setting is set to Download from TV (see Auto
Channel Setting on page 139).
STOP REC
8
Press to stop recording.
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing
STOP REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
Tip
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press the front
panel CH + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on), or CH – to switch to SCART NORM (loop
through off). Loop through is automatically reset to
off after recording has finished. Note that you can’t
switch loop through on if recording from the
AV1 (RGB)-TV connector.
Note
1 Except during Chase Play.
84
En
1 Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART
cable.
2
Press HOME MENU.
3 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live
TV’ > ‘TV’s Tuner’.
4 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’ > ‘Auto
Channel Setting’ > ‘Download from TV’.
• If the Download from TV option appears grayed out,
check the connections to your TV and try again.
• Depending on your TV, you might have to switch off
and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it
back in and switching it on again.
5
Follow the on-screen instructions.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 85 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
Using the recorder’s internal tuner for Pause Live TV
If you haven’t connected to your TV using a SCART cable
(or your TV is not compatible with AV Link) you can use
the recorder’s internal tuner for the Pause Live TV.
1
STOP REC
3
Press to stop the recording.
The operation is slightly different depending on the
viewing source. See the Operation table below for details.
Press HOME MENU.
2 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live
TV’ > ‘Recorder’s Tuner’.
See Pause Live TV on page 145 to do this.
You can record the channel selected on the recorder.
Using Pause Live TV
PAUSE LIVE TV
1
Start recording the current TV channel.
Recording continues with playback paused.
• Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording
to start.
PLAY
2
Press to start playback.
You can also use the scan buttons (/), pause
( PAUSE) and stop ( STOP) — all without affecting the
recording.
Tip
• When the Pause Live TV setting (see page 145) is set to
TV’s Tuner, you can press PAUSE LIVE TV while the
recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately
start recording. When set to Recorder’s Tuner, it is not
possible to use the Pause Live TV feature from standby.
• After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will take at least 10
seconds for the picture to change (during this time,
all controls except the power button are inoperative).
(Note that startup from standby is not possible if you
have selected Recorder’s Tuner in Pause Live TV on
page 145.)
• Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the Pause Live TV feature.
Operation table
Viewing source
TV built-in analog tuner
TV/DVD
Pause Live TV
DVR source
mode of DVR
function button
TV
–
Pause Live TV
Condition
Preset channel of DVR and TV are matched after
downloading from TV.
Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched after
downloading from TV. Record TV programme that you’re
watching.
TV built-in digital tuner
External input of TV
TV
TV
–
Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be shared by DVR even
after Download from TV. Record TV programme that you’re
watching.
–
Direct TV recording*1 Record TV programme that you’re watching.
DVR built-in analog tuner
DVD
DVR built-in Pause Live TV
analog tuner
DVR built-in digital tuner
DVD
DVR built-in Pause Live TV
digital tuner
*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording.
2 • Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you are unsure.
• This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you’re unsure
about your TV’s compatibility with this feature.
85
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 86 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
06
Recording
About timer recordings
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programmes can be set to record just once,
every day, or every week.
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if
recording to the HDD).
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer programme will
be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you
have watched it yet or not.
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 142 for more on this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the programme to the HDD for you.
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
Programming System) and PDC (Programme Delivery
Control) systems used by many analog TV stations to
ensure that a timer recording catches the whole
programme even when the programme is not running to
schedule. Up to eight timer programmes can be set with
VPS/PDC on.
• When the front panel display is set to ON, the timer
indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when
the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means
that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc
loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an
HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not
recordable).
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
some functions.
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title
(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12
hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds
between titles.
• VPS/PDC works only with analog stations; it does not
work with digital TV stations.
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download
programme information. During these times, VPS/
PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you
set a timer recording for these times.
• If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programmes that
are programmed to start at the same time, then the
programme that actually starts first takes priority.
Extending a timer recording in progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast
programme overruns, for example.
Cancelling or extending the timer
REC
Important
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32
timer programmes waiting to be recorded.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
• Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
86
En
Press and hold for three seconds during a
1
timer recording.
Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears
from the front panel display indicating that the timer has
been cancelled.
REC
Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30
2
minute blocks.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 87 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
Stopping a timer recording
the lesser important programme. If one of the
overlapping programmes is a regular timer
programme for a digital broadcast, you may choose
‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid having it overlap with
a separately scheduled programme (see Skipping a
regular timer programme on page 77).
STOP REC
1
Press during a timer recording.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
RECORDER
1
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
2
[Front panel] Press and hold for three
seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED. If any
buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel,
LOCKED is briefly displayed again.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold (Stop) on
the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for
three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED.
Simultaneous recording and
playback (Chase Play)
HDD
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in
progress from the start, without having to wait until the
recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the
recording).
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress. You can watch anything else already on the
HDD (or on a DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using
the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on
page 94).
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input.
PLAY
•
Press during recording to start playback
from the beginning of the current recording1.
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Timer recording FAQ
Frequently Asked Questions
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see Lock Disc on page 132), and that there are
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer programme!
Why not?
You can’t enter a timer programme if the clock isn’t
set.
• What happens when two or more timer programmes
overlap?
Basically, the programme with the earlier recording
start time has priority. However, the recorder will
start recording the programme with the later start
time after the earlier programme is finished.
If schedule to record two programmes have the same
times (but different channels, for example), then only
one of the two programmes will be recorded. In this
event you should cancel the scheduled recording of
•
Press during recording to select another
title to play.
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
• To stop playback, press STOP (recording will
continue).
• To stop recording, press
continue).
STOP REC (playback will
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 146). Also, during simultaneous recording
and playback, if the TV line system of the playback
track/title changes then playback will automatically
stop.
Note
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.
87
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 88 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
Recording from an external component
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs.
1 Make sure that the component you want to
record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.
VIDEO IN
2
Press repeatedly to select one of the
external inputs to record from.
The current input is shown on-screen and in the front
panel display:
• AV2/L1 – Input 11
• L2 – Input 2 (front panel)
• L3 – Input 3
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio and
Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In
on page 140).
When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R
disc, a title menu is created from which you can select
titles when you play the disc. There are a number of
different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the
content of the disc.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then
using the /// followed by ENTER to select titles
and start playback.
Finalizing a disc
• To watch video coming in via the DV input (front
panel), select DV > DV Video Playback from the
Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on
page 101).
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can
be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped
with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.2
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 83 for detailed information.
HDD/DVD
4
Select the HDD or DVD for recording.
REC
5
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs.
A number of players (including many Pioneer models)
can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode,
finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD
-R discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD
recorders may be able to (finalization might be
necessary). Check the manual that came with the player
to check what kinds of discs it will play.
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched),
adjust on the source component or your TV before
recording.
REC MODE
3
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players
Press to start recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 80 for more details.
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc
Name on page 132 before starting the steps below.
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However,
if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc,
then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW,
you can still record and edit even after finalizing.
although the title menu will disappear if you do so.
Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu.
Important
• Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record anything else
on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW
disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 133
for how to do this.
Note
1 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 140).
2 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional
information about the TV system settings on page 146 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
88
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 89 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc
can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even
after finalizing.
5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
During finalization:
• DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and DVD+R DL discs
must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/
players. Note however that some recorders/players
will not play even finalized dual-layer discs.
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/
+RW disc is going to take more than around four
minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around
four minutes before completion, the option to cancel
disappears.
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding.
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R
disc.
2
HOME MENU
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ > ‘Next Screen’.
3
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to
20 minutes.
Disc Setup
Basic
Finalize
Next Screen
Initialize
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Start
Optimize HDD
Initializing recordable DVD discs
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode
recording or VR mode recording.1
ENTER
4
For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and
DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title menu style,
then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to
cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected
on any DVD player.
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,
the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By
default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 90 if you
want to change the default to Video mode.
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode
recording, you must initialize it before recording anything
on the disc.
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in
order to erase the contents of the disc.
Finalize
Important
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc
will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there
is nothing on the disc that you want to keep!
• You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in
a different format if it was originally initialized on an
older DVD recorder.
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These
discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on
this recorder.
• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t reinitialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.
Note
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.
89
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 90 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Recording
06
1
HOME MENU
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
DVD-RW Auto Initialize
DVD-RW
ENTER
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR
Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’.
• Default setting: VR Mode
Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you
insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired
initialization mode before inserting a disc.
Disc Setup
Basic
VR Mode
Start
Initialize
Video Mode
Start
Finalize
Initialize DVD+RW
Start
1
HOME MENU
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
Optimize HDD
ENTER
2
Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto Init.’, then
‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’.
Disc Setup
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except
DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour).
Initializing Disc
Pr 1
1 min left
90
En
Basic
Input Disc Name
VR Mode
Initialize
Lock Disc
Video Mode
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Optimize HDD
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 91 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playback
07
Chapter 7
Playback
PLAY
Introduction
3
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor
buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any
screen, use the RETURN/EXIT button.
Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of
every screen shows which buttons do what.
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/
DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of
some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded.
• Many functions are not available when a Video CD is
playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc
Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 95).
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The
PhotoViewer on page 125.
Basic playback
ALL
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD.
Start playback.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
/// buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to
navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons
and ENTER for Video CD menus.
• There may be a slight pause when playback switches
from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc.
• See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
STOP
4
Press to stop playback.
5 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
PLAY
STOP
Important
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any
kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is
specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.
PAUSE
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don’t
allow certain playback controls to operate at certain
points in the disc. This is not a malfunction.
Select the HDD or DVD for playback.
• If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below.
• Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.
OPEN/CLOSE
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
HDD/DVD
1
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the
front panel CH +/– buttons.)
DVD+R/DVD+RW only:
PREV may not always skip to the previous title.
2
[Front panel] Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
play face down).
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
the note on page 93.
91
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 92 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
07
Playback
SETUP
1
/ST–
4
F.S.SURR
7
/TUNE+
SR+
2
3
ENTER
/ST+
5
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
0
CLEAR
ENTER
CM BACK
CM SKIP
/
/
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a
chapter number then press ENTER to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently
playing title.
On some discs, you can also use the number buttons to select numbered items in
the disc menu.
VR mode only: During playback, enter a
title number then press ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry
and start again.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
STOP
(Commercial back/skip)
Turn the Smart Jog counter-clockwise for
backward skip; turn clockwise for forward
skip. You can search up to two hours in
either direction.
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction. You can also execute frame-by-frame playback/backward
scanning via the Smart Jog.
PAUSE
MENU
ENTER
RETURN/EXIT
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video
disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this
recorder will display the Disc Navigator.
Press MENU to display the disc menu.)
PREV
NEXT
SETUP
/ST–
4
F.S.SURR
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
92
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
SOUND
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the
front panel CH +/– buttons.)
During playback, enter a title number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
0
CLEAR
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVDVideo disc menus; press ENTER to select
items.
ENTER
CM BACK
CM SKIP
Press to return to the previous level of a
DVD-Video disc menu.
/
En
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
1
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped.
Playback automatically stops after the end
of a title is reached.
PLAY
/
(Commercial back/skip)
Turn the Smart Jog counter-clockwise for
backward skip; turn clockwise for forward
skip. You can search up to two hours in
either direction.
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction. You can also execute frame-by-frame playback/backward
scanning via the Smart Jog.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 93 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playback
07
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
PAUSE
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
audio CDs1, and WMA/MP3 files.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
Press to start playback.
PLAY
STOP
PREV
NEXT
Press to stop playback.
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
SETUP
1
/ST–
4
Except WMA: Press to start scanning.
Press again to increase the scanning
speed. (There are two scan speeds; the
current scan speed is shown on-screen.)
F.S.SURR
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
0
CLEAR
ENTER
PREV
NEXT
SETUP
1
/ST–
4
F.S.SURR
7
/TUNE+
SR+
2
3
ENTER
/ST+
5
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
0
CLEAR
Press to skip to previous/next track (or
folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During
playback you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
CM BACK
CM SKIP
/
ENTER
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
RETURN/EXIT
Press to skip to previous/next track.
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
display the previous/next page. (During
playback you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,
use to select numbered menu items.
Video CD in non-PBC mode only:
(Commercial back/skip)
Turn the Smart Jog counter-clockwise for
backward skip; turn clockwise for forward
skip. You can search up to two hours in
either direction.
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed (forward only).
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward only). You can also execute
frame-by-frame playback via the
Smart Jog.
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
can select what to watch.2
PLAY
STOP
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the place last
stopped.
Press to stop playback.
Video CD only: You can resume playback
from the same point by pressing PLAY.
(Press STOP again to cancel the
resume function.)
Note
1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels
on page 99).
2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on
page 95).
93
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 94 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
07
Playback
Playing DivX video files
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DivX video files.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped.
Playback of titles (DivX files) proceeds in
alphabetical order.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Using the Disc Navigator to browse
the contents of a disc
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view
information on titles.
See also Editing on page 104 for more on editing
recordable discs.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
/
AUDIO
MAIN
SUB
+
SUBTITLE
MAIN
SUB
+
Press to skip to previous/next title. (During
playback you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
HDD/DVD
1
2
While paused, press to advance one
frame. Press and hold to start slow motion
playback (press repeatedly to change the
slow motion play speed). You can also
execute frame-by-frame playback via the
Smart Jog.
Select the HDD or DVD.
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Open the Disc Navigator.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Press to display subtitle information; press
repeatedly to change subtitles.
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Press to display the playback audio type;
press repeatedly to change the playback
audio type.
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
2ch
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the
Home Menu.
3
Browse the list of titles.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
• Use the PREV/ NEXT buttons to display the
previous/next page of titles.
• To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title
see Set Thumbnail on page 108.
• For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a
thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set
Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 145.
4
94
En
ENTER
Play the highlighted title.
• You can also select Play from the command menu
options.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 95 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playback
07
Changing the display style of the Disc
Navigator
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the
same time.
1
Display the View Options panel.
The View Options panel
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11
Style
4 Titles
4 Titles
ENTER
3
Select what you want to play.
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all navigated
in the same way.
The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc.
Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder
that you want to play.
Disc Navigator
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
2ch
2
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
3
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
NEW first
Genre
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
All Genres
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
02.Pop
03.Dance
CD
WMA/MP3
Divx
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Sort order
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which
takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
002.Escape
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
• For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/
MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the
playback area between CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX.
This can only be done while the disc is stopped.
ENTER
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’,
then press ENTER to see the available view options.
• Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view
• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first),
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest
first)
Scanning discs
• Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre
You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
backwards.1
A L L (except WMA)
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to the new
display preferences.
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only
discs
DVD-Video
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DivX
1
During playback, start reverse or forward
scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2
Press repeatedly to change the scanning
speed.
There are four scanning speeds available when playing
HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also
possible with HDD and DVD video.2
There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc.
1
HOME MENU
Display the Home Menu.
PLAY
3
Resume normal playback.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.
Note
1 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.
95
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 96 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playback
07
Playing in slow motion
The Play Mode menu
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
ALL
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX
titles can only be played forwards in slow motion.
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and programme play functions.
•
HOME MENU
Select ‘Play Mode’ from the Home Menu.
There is no sound when playing in slow motion.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
PAUSE
1
Pause playback.
/
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
/
2
Press and hold to start slow motion
reverse or forward play.
/
/
3
Press repeatedly to change the slow
motion speed.
The current playback speed is indicated on-screen.
PLAY
4
Resume normal playback.
Frame advance/frame reverse
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
Search Mode
ALL
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time2 or by title/chapter/
folder/track number.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play
Mode menu, then choose a search option.
The available search options depend on the type of disc.
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc1 or the
HDD frame-by-frame.
SETUP
1
/ST–
4
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only
use frame advance.
F.S.SURR
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
0
2
Enter a title/chapter/folder/track number
or a search time.
PAUSE
1
/
Pause playback.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
/
2
Back up or advance one frame with each
press.
• You can also do this by rotating the Smart Jog.
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
PLAY
3
Resume normal playback.
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and
30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,
press 6.
3
ENTER
Start playback.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.
2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
96
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 97 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playback
07
A-B Repeat
DVD HDD
CD
Repeat play
Video CD DivX
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.1
ALL
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with programme play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
programme list (see Programme play below).2
ENTER
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’
from the Play Mode menu.
2 ENTER With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at
the point you want the loop to start.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the
point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
ENTER
• When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW, or from the HDD, the start and end
points of the loop must be in the same title.
• To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B
Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such
as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
ENTER
•
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode
menu, then choose a repeat play mode.
Play Mode
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
• To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from
the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu
OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
Programme play
HDD DVD-Video
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
chapters3/folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Programme’ from the Play Mode
menu, then ‘Input/Edit Programme’.
The Input/Edit Programme screen varies according to the
disc type. Below is the DVD input screen.
Programme
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title
Title
Title
Title
(01-03)
01
02
03
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
Note
1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled.
2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled.
3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending
on the disc.
97
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 98 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
07
Playback
ENTER
2
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for
the current step in the programme list.
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the programme list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
• To delete a step from the programme list, highlight
the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.
3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list.
A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
Displaying and switching subtitles
DVD-Video DivX
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle
language during playback.1
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle
options.
SUBTITLE
• MAIN SUB +
Select/change the subtitle language.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
• To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR.
PLAY
4
Play the programme list.
Programme play remains active until you cancel
programme play, erase the programme list, eject the disc
or switch off the recorder.
Tip
• To save your programme list and exit the programme
edit screen without starting playback, press
HOME MENU.
• During programme play, press NEXT to skip to
the next programme step.
• To repeat play the programme list, select
Programme Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode
menu (see Repeat play on page 97).
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off
programme play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc
Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase
the programme list.
• From the programme menu you can also:
Start Programme Play – Starts playback of a saved
programme list
Cancel Programme Play – Turns off programme
play, but does not erase the programme list
Erase Programme List – Erases the programme list
and turns off programme play
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks
DVD-Video DivX
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two
or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you
can switch the soundtrack during playback.2
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
options.
AUDIO
• MAIN SUB +
Change the audio soundtrack.
The current audio language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,
connect this recorder to receiver subwoofer via the
digital output. See Basic connections on page 10 for
connection details.
Note
1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 141.
2 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 141.
98
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 99 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playback
07
Switching audio channels
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
1
For HDD and VR mode content recorded with bilingual
audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R)
channel, or both (L+R).2
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these
discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as
well as individual channels in each.
Switching camera angles
DVD-Video
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles — check the disc box for details: it should
be marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle
scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same
icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles
are available (this can be switched off if you prefer — see
Angle Indicator on page 143).
ANGLE
•
AUDIO
+
Switch the camera angle.
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.
MAIN
SUB
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
• MAIN SUB +
Press repeatedly to display/switch the
audio channel.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated onscreen.
Displaying disc information on-screen
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
L+R – Both channels (default)
L – Left channel only
R – Right channel only
CD
Video CD WMA/MP3
Stereo – Stereo (default)
1/L – Left channel only
2/R – Right channel only
Super VCD
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1/Stereo (default)
1 L – Soundtrack 1/Left channel
1 R – Soundtrack 1/Right channel
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2/Stereo
2 L – Soundtrack 2/Left channel
2 R – Soundtrack 2/Right channel
You can display various on-screen information about the
disc loaded or the HDD.
DISPLAY
•
Display/change the on-screen information.
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
• To hide the information display, press DISPLAY
repeatedly until it disappears.
HDD and removable disc activity display
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD button to switch
between the two kinds of display.
Note
1 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 143).
2 • When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 141) or listen via the analog outputs
if you need to switch the audio channel.
• When playing a Dolby Digital source, you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer — see Dual mono
setting on page 32.
99
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 100 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
07
Playback
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
HDD DVD
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time.
This is because of the slightly different frame rates of
TV broadcasts versus DVD.
DVD-RW Video
Remain –h––m
Stop
0h08m left
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time
display when the disc is paused.
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
the broadcast TV programme contains copy control
information.
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
Recording time
Relative playback position
Shows recording restrictions for
the current channel programme
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Disc Name
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
Rem.
0h35m
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
Copy Once
: Comedy shows
DVD Mode
Indicates copy-protected material
Indicates a multi-angle scene
Play
DVD-R Video
Title Name
3–2
0. 00. 15
Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0h01m52s
4.32Mbps
!
: 21/11 Football match
Indicates the data transfer rate
Tip
• See Switching camera angles on page 99 for more on
multi-angle scene switching.
• When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
only.
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
• The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the
same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
100
En
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
is calculated based on a 12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the
displayed record setting.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 101 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
08
Chapter 8
Playing and recording from a DV
camcorder
You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder
connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this
recorder.
Recording from a DV camcorder
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format.
• You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
Important
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is
more than two minutes of blank tape, this recorder
will stop recording and the camcorder should stop
(depending on the camcorder).
• You can’t control this recorder remotely from a
component connected to the DV IN jack.
Playing from a DV camcorder
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN jack.
Copying from a DV source
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control both the
camcorder and this recorder.
2 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you would like.
See DV Input on page 140 for more on this.
Important
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 140).
• For best results when recording from a DV camcorder
to this recorder, we recommend cueing the
camcorder to the place you want to start recording
from and setting the camcorder to play-pause.
HOME MENU Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video Playback’
3
from the Home Menu.
4 Start playback on the camcorder.
Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV.
• To record the incoming video, press HDD/DVD to
select the HDD or a DVD for recording, then press
REC. Press STOP REC to finish recording.
If there is no signal from the device connected to the
DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording
will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a
recordable signal.
• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if
the signal is interrupted during recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 80 for more details.
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
REC MODE
2
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 83 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you would like.
See DV Input on page 140 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 140).
HOME MENU Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV
4
Source’ from the Home Menu.
• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is
in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
101
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 102 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
08
DV Auto Copy
ENTER
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or
‘Record to DVD’.
6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
, , , , , and buttons.
Select ‘Start Rec’.
Stop
1.02.22
Stop
Control with these
buttons
Start Rec
Pause Rec
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
REC MODE
2
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 83 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See DV Input on page 140 for more on this.
ENTER
7
DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the
contents of a DV source to the HDD or a DVD.
Stop Rec
HDD
Rem.
SP
(2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 140).
HOME MENU Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Auto Copy’ from
4
the Home Menu.
• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is
in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
ENTER
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be
recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder
instead and recording will start immediately.
• HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter
marker is inserted every time there is a break in the
timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the
recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for
example.
• If you don’t want to see the DV recording screen
during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press
again to display).
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT
button.
102
En
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or
‘Record to DVD’.
The DV tape is rewound to the beginning. Once it is
rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and
copied to either the HDD or a DVD.
• If there is a gap of two minutes or more between
recorded contents, the copying process is
automatically stopped.
• Once copying is finished, the DV tape is automatically
rewound.
• To cancel the copying process, press
more than three seconds.
STOP REC for
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 103 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
08
About automatic finalization
If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW
disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized after
copying is complete.
• You can’t customize the background for DVD-R/-RW
or DVD+R/+RW disc finalization.
• No title names are assigned.
• If you want to give the disc a name, please do so
before you start the copy (see Input Disc Name on
page 132).
• If a timer recording is scheduled to start, and in some
other instances, the disc will not be finalized.
Frequently Asked Questions
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on
page 140) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.1
About DV
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-1995, you
can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
• You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the DV IN jack.
• It may not always be possible to control the
connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.
• DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo
16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz.
This recorder can only record one stereo audio track.
Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on
page 140).
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48
kHz (not 44.1 kHz).
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable is disconnected.
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output
functionality.
Note
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the External Audio setting (page 140).
103
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 104 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
09
Editing
Chapter 9
Editing
Editing options
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.
HDD
DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM
(VR mode)
Original
Play List
Create (page 106)
Play (page 106)
Erase (page 106)
Edit > Title Name (page 107)
Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 108)
Edit > Erase Section (page 108)
Edit > Divide (page 109)
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 109)
Edit > Set Genre (page 110)
Edit > Lock (page 111)
Edit > Combine (page 112)
Genre Name (page 112)
Multi-Mode (page 113)
*1 DVD-R/-RW only
En
Edit > Move (page 111)
Undo (page 113)
104
*1
*1
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 105 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
HDD/DVD
The Disc Navigator screen
•
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video
content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR
mode) discs, DVD+R/+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as
video content on the hard disk drive.
Press to switch between the HDD and DVD
Disc Navigator screens.
• If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD
-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting
Play List from the view options panel (press , then
select Play List from the view options, then Play List).
Important
Disc Navigator (DVD)
• Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line
System setting different to the current setting of the
recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Additional information
about the TV system settings on page 146.
Style
PlayList
HDD
SP
Remain
0h30m
2
Display the Disc Navigator screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home
Menu.
Title list
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
9
Recent first
Available
recording time
Selected
title
SP
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
Press to display the command menu panel.
Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the
menus.
PREV
•
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Press to exit the Disc Navigator.
Some editing commands ask you whether you want to
keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video
Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).
Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise. The edit
point you choose will only be accurate to within one-half
to one second. On the other hand, these edit points will
be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD
-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
1h00m(1.0G)
Title thumbnail Title information Command
menu panel
•
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
Editing accuracy
DISC
NAVIGATOR
View options panel
9
• Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are
recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
3
Select the HDD or DVD.
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line
System setting different to the current setting of the
recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be
played.
1
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Original
Original
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
HDD/DVD
101
4 Titles
4 Titles
HDD genres
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content you can assign different genres
to titles. There are 20 genres in total, including five userdefinable ones that you can name as you like.
NEXT
When in the title list, press to display the
previous/next page if there are more titles than can
be displayed.
DISPLAY
•
Press to change the title information displayed
in the title list.
105
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 106 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
Create
ENTER
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.
Before you can use this command, make sure that the
Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the
left.
2
Select ‘Play’ from the command menu
panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
ENTER
1
panel.
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP Play
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
Select ‘Create’ from the command menu
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPEdit
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
Disc Navigator (DVD)
All Genres
0Titles
No title
4 Titles
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
HDD
SP
Play
1h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Edit
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
2
Select an original title to add to the Play
List.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as
necessary to the Play List.
Play
Erase
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+RW disc increases the available
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.1
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode
or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not result in any more free
space on the disc.
1
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Highlight the title you want to erase.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
Use this function to start playback of a title.
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to play.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
2
panel.
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu
ENTER
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Tip
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER.
Note
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.
106
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 107 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
Title Name
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to
40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/
+RW discs.
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or
rename).
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name).
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
ENTER
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return
to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN/EXIT.
Using a USB keyboard to enter a name
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the
command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
Title Name
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
Erase
Edit Section
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
All Genres
HDD
SP
Function
Key
1h00m(1.0G)
Cancel
Cancel
F1
ENTER
3
Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys, use the
following keys when entering names:
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes
entering names very quick and convenient.1 When in
USB keyboard input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in
the lower-left of the screen.2
F2
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
OK
Clear
O
ø
UUUUY
6 7 8 9 <
¥ ] ˆ ÷ x
¨ © a– << ¬
¸ 1 –o 1/4
<<
DN O OOO
0 1 2 3 4 5
+ – /@ [
c £ \ §
2 3
´ µ¶ ·
= >
± { _|
– ®
1 3
/2 /4 ¿
ß$%
_ &
} ~ ¡
˚
`
Select small
Delete character at the current cursor
position
back
space
Delete the character at the previous
cursor position
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
CAPS
small
Select CAPS
delete
Input a name for the selected title.
Input Title Name
Change the cursor position
enter
esc
Enter the name
Exit the input screen
Space
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the / buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lowercase, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons
( PREV/ NEXT).
Note
1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See also Connecting a USB device
on page 55 for more connection information.
• Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters.
2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will automatically switch to remote control
input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode.
107
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 108 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
Set Thumbnail
Erase Section
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in
that title.
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording
made from the TV.
1
Highlight the title you want to change
the thumbnail picture for.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
1
Highlight the title containing the section
you want to erase.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
ENTER
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the
command menu panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you
can find the frame you want.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
3
!
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Title SP
Name
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Recent first
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
8
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Erase
Edit Section
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Divide
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
Video Mode Compatible Editing
1h00m(1.0G)
3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4
Rec. time
SP
2h00m
Frame Accurate Editing
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 105.
4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls
(, , , , etc.) to find the start of the section
to erase, then press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
shows the start of the section.
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
Erase Section (HDD)
OK
OK
Exit
Exit
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Rec. time
You can also use the chapter and time search features
(press the YELLOW button), and the Smart Jog (for
CM SKIP and CM BACK).
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
From
To
Exit
4
108
En
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.
2h00m
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 109 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
4 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
find the place you want to divide the title.
ENTER
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way,
find the end of the section to erase, then press
ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.
Divide Title (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Rec. time
2h00m
10–1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
Divide
Cancel
5 ENTER Press to divide the title at the current
playback position.
ENTER
6
Divide
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
!
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
Yes
No
Chapter Edit
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
1
Highlight the title you want to divide.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the
command menu panel.
3
1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
!
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 105.
!
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 105.
109
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 110 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
4
Select the command you want:
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use
the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then
press ENTER.
Set Genre
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2
Rec. time
Chapters
1–1
ENTER
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc
Navigator screen.
HDD
SP
1h00m
5
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.
0.00.00
Play
1
Highlight the title you want to assign a
genre to.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
disc or 99 chapters per HDD title).
• Erase1/Move2 – Erase or move chapters: Select the
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.
Select whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the
command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
Move command only: Select the destination for the
chapter, and press ENTER.
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
Recent first
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
001
002
003
004
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
005
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
3
• Combine3 – Combine two adjacent chapters into
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER.
Select a genre for the title.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
4 Titles
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
Rec. time
2
3
SP
1h00m
4
5
No
Category
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
Movies
Erase
Edit Section
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPDrama
Edit Chapter
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SPEntertainmt.
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
Comedy
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Title SP
name
9
Recent first
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2
1
Erase
Edit Section
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
All Genres
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Erase
1h00m
Rec. time
Move
0h01m
Chapter
Cancel
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Title SP
Name
Divide
News
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Sport
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
Note
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 VR mode Play List only.
3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.
110
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 111 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
Lock
Move
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Original only
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
1
Important
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the Undo option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
1
Highlight the title you want to move.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command
menu panel.
Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr 72ch
SP Name
SP
11/29Mon
SP
Title
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 7 SP
SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
Erase
Edit Section
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
7
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Title SP
Name
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
All Genres
3
10Titles
9
Recent first
Erase
EditSection
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Move
Genre Name
7 SP
Combine
Play List
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
1
ENTER
3
Select a new position for the title.
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Title to move
1h00m(1.0G)
Disc Navigator (DVD)
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
11
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
Insert position
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
111
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 112 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
Combine
Genre Name
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
HDD
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.
Use this command to rename one of the five userdefinable genres (Free 1 to Free 5).
1
Highlight the title you want to combine.
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
This title will remain in the same place after combining
with another title.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
11
10Titles
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
Multi-Mode
Multi-Mode
0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Erase
EditSection
20:00 FRI 3/12
SP
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 7 SP
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Move
Genre Name
Combine
SP
Play List
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
SP
ENTER
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPEdit
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
All Genres
Erase
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
2
9
Recent first
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 7 2ch
SP
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
Title Name
4 Titles
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the
command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
ENTER
4
2
names.
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Select one of the user-definable genre
1h00m(1.0G)
Disc Navigator (HDD)
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP Free1
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Free4
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
ENTER
3
MENU
Input a name for the genre.
• The name can be up to 12 characters long.
Input Genre Name
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Cancel
SPGenre Name
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
2h00m(1.0G)
Play List
8
Fr ee 1
CAPS
small
1h00m(1.0G)
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
DN O OOO
0 1 2 3 4 5
+ – /@ [
\ §
2 3
´ µ¶ ·
c £
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
!
OK
No
UUUUY
= >
± { _|
– ®
1 3
/2 /4 ¿
ß$%
_ &
} ~ ¡
˚
`
Space
ENTER
4
En
ø
6 7 8 9 <
¥ ] ˆ ÷ x
¨ © a– << ¬
¸ 1 –o 1/4
OK to combine titles
1 and 3 ?
Yes
112
Clear
O
<<
2
4 Titles
Free5
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
All Genres
10Titles
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Free3
Edit
Recent first
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended
to title 1.
11
Erase
Free2
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
3
Select another title to combine with the
first.
This title will be appended to the first title selected.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
101
ENTER
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and exit.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 113 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Editing
09
Multi-Mode
Undo
HDD
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at
once, for example.
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you
can only undo the last edit you made).
ENTER
ENTER
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
Pr 4 SP
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
Edit
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Recent first
4 Titles
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
0Titles
11/29 MON 7:00PM
Play
No title
11/29Mon
7:00PM 2ch SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu
panel.
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc
Navigator screen.
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
Multi-Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
2
Select titles from the title list.
Selected titles are marked with a .
• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.
ENTER
3
Select the command that you want
applied to all the marked titles.
For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
Lock
Unlock
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPChange Genre
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SPSingle Mode
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Multi-Mode
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Erase
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Frequently asked questions
• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the
titles are no longer displayed, but the content
remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.
• I can’t edit my disc!
You may find that as the available recording time is
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no
longer possible. This is because information about
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is
automatically exited.
113
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 114 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
10
Copying and backup
Chapter 10
Copying and backup
Introduction
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD.
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy
below for detailed instructions.
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only
copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 115
for detailed instructions.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum
copying times on page 150 for more on copying times.
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is
always done in real-time.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in
the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are
put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto
Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 143).
Restrictions on copying
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy
Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD.
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1
or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode
DVD-R, or CPRM-compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM
on page 80 for more on this). Only one instance of a copyonce protected title can be added to the Copy List, and
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copyonce protected).
114
En
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown.
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
One Touch Copy
* See also Copyright above.
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start the copy.
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in
whatever recording mode is currently set.
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when
trying to copy from the HDD.
REC MODE
1
If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD,
select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title
playing will not result in a better quality recording.
ONE TOUCH COPY
2
Press during playback to copy the current
title.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied.
• High-speed copying is used when copying from the
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.
• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the
title.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 115 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Copying and backup
10
Cancelling One Touch Copy
Copying to the HDD
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
• The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW.
ONE TOUCH COPY
•
Press and hold for more than a second.
Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is
erased.
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space
available for recording does not return to the precopy figure.
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected,
copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will
not be copied.
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy
Copying to DVD
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also
copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40 characters
of a name are copied.
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same positions as the original when recording on
to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/
+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM
disc for this type of material.
Using Copy Lists
* See also Copyright on page 114.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the
actual content is not being altered.
Copying from HDD to DVD
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes1) widescreen
material can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or
DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.
Important
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see Additional information about
the TV system settings on page 146).
• When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode
Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9 to MN15 modes
cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW
(VR mode) or DVD-RAM.
• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be highspeed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode)
or DVD-RAM.
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 161) will erase the
Copy List.
1
• XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via One Touch
Copy.
• Titles over eight hours cannot be copied to singlelayer DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy.
Use DVD+R DL discs for titles over eight hours.
Load a recordable DVD.
• It is possible to complete the following steps without
having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an
uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are
slightly different.
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the
copy, make sure it is initialized before you start.
2
HOME MENU
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode
cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using One Touch
Copy.
Note
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
115
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 116 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Copying and backup
10
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to
the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW:
ENTER
Select ‘HDD DVD’.
3
• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.
HDD
DVD
DVD/CD
• When adding titles that contain material of more
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title
if high-speed copying is possible.
HDD
Disc Back-up
• If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to
step 5 below.
Depending on the title1, high-speed copying may not be
possible to DVDs.
6
Press to display the command menu panel.
4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Continue Using Previous Copy List’.
The Command Menu panel
Copy
HDD
Continue Using Previous Copy List
Recent first
Create New Copy List
All Genres
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
ENTER
Copy
Recent first
All Genres
20:00
21:00
23:00
22:00
20:00
13:00
21:00
20:00
Wed29/03
Mon 27/03
S a t 25/03
Thu 23/03
Wed 22/03
Mon 20/03
F r i 17/03
Wed 15/03
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
WED
MON
S AT
THU
WED
MON
FRI
WED
29/03
27/03
25/03
23/03
22/03
20/03
17/03
15/03
20:00
21:00
23:00
22:00
20:00
13:00
21:00
20:00
Pr 2
SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Sports
SP
Pr 2
4.3G
4.3G
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Title Edit
1>2>3
1
2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Back
Next
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00
1h00m(2.0G)
Sports
SP
Pr 2
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
Wed29/03
Mon 27/03
S a t 25/03
Thu 23/03
Wed 22/03
Mon 20/03
F r i 17/03
Wed 15/03
Next
Wed29/03
1>2>3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Back
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Select Title
29/03
27/03
25/03
23/03
22/03
20/03
17/03
15/03
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.
Copy
5
Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a
title and press ENTER to add).
WED
MON
SAT
TH U
WED
MON
FRI
WED
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
7
Title
1>2>3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20:00
20:00
• If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List ,
skip to step 10 below.
8
DVD (Video mode)
Select Title
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
Back
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Next
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
0.0G
4.3G
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
Note
1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW:
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode.
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW:
• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On)).
• LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.
• Bilingual recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD:
• XP+ titles.
116
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 117 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Copying and backup
10
8 To edit a title, highlight it using the / buttons,
then press ENTER.
ENTER
10
Copy
Title Edit
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
1
2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
Erase
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Title Name
Erase Section
Move
Preview
Wed29/03
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
Pr 2
1>2>3
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Back
Next
SP
1h00m(2.0G)
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
A menu of editing commands appears:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Erase on page 106).
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List
(see Title Name on page 107).
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section
on page 108).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see Move on page 111).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy
List.
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
Divide on page 109).
• Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into
one (see Combine on page 112).
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title
(see Chapter Edit on page 109):
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the
chapter order.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title
(see Set Thumbnail on page 108).
• Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy
(see Recording Mode on page 118).
4.3G
4.3G
There are several options available from the next screen:
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 118).
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc
or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that
of naming titles; see Title Name on page 107.)
• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R after copying.1
Select a title menu style from the following screen.
ENTER
11
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Copy
HDD DVD (Video Mode)
Start Copy
1>2>3
HDD
Copy Time
DVD-RW
Video Mode
Recording Mode
Disc Name
High-Speed
Finalize
Off
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
Back
Recording Mode
0h 16m
Input Disc Name
Finalize
Start Copy
4.3G
4.3G
• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied
when copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R/+RW (see Bilingual on page 119).
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and
the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total
bar will be purple.
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if
the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is
already full.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
9
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1
2
Next
Cancel
20:00
Copy
Title Edit
Back
Display the command menu panel.
Note
1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
117
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 118 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Copying and backup
10
Copying from DVD to HDD
ENTER
Important
6
Select a title to edit.
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when
a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is
loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard
protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy
function, however (See One Touch Copy on
page 114).
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Erase on page 106).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see Move on page 111).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy
List.
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The Copy List will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Play List and
Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 161).
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
ENTER
7
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu
panel to proceed to the copy options screen.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode below).
ENTER
1
HOME MENU
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Recording Mode
ENTER
Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.
2
ENTER
ENTER
3
Select a Copy List type.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
2
ENTER
4
Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a
title and press ENTER to add).
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu
panel to proceed to the title edit screen.
Select a recording mode for the copy.
• High-Speed Copy1 – The Copy List is copied at the
same recording quality as the original.
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN2 – The Copy List is
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than
the original, the copy will not be better quality than
the original.)
If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1 to MN323, LPCM or XP+4) from the
Recording Quality box that appears.
Note
1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as
the original.
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter
markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see
also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 143).
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.
4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.
118
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 119 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Copying and backup
• Optimized1,2 – The recording quality is automatically
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in realtime.
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
10
Using disc backup
* See also Copyright on page 114.
This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy
of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD+R/
+RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk
drive3, then on to another recordable DVD disc.
HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’ from
1
the Home Menu.
Bilingual
ENTER
2
1
Select the title containing the audio you
want to change.
Select a backup option.
Disc Back-up
Start new disc back-up
ENTER
2
Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command
menu panel.
Resume writing data
Erase back-up data
ENTER
3
Select a bilingual audio option.
There are three backup options:
• Start new disc back-up – Start making a backup of
a disc.
• Resume writing data – Record the backup data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
• Erase back-up data – Erase the backup data on the
HDD.
3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of.
You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs
(excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).
Disc Back-up
No disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start
Cancel
Note
1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter
markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see
also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 143).
2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always
exactly fill a disc.
3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
119
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 120 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Copying and backup
10
7 After the recorder has finished recording the
backup disc, you can select whether to make another
backup of the same data or exit.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Start’.
Disc Back-up
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the backup process by pressing
ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc
and load a blank* recordable DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t
have to be blank, although the previous contents of the
disc will be erased in the backup process.
Cancel
• Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another backup copy,
return to step 6 above.
8 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the
HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Disc Back-up
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
Start
Cancel
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW
ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup.
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/
-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed
up to DVD+R/+RW discs.
6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Yes
recordable disc
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the backup process by pressing
ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
However, this will make the disc unusable (although
if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can
re-initialize it in order to make it usable again — see
Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 89.)
En
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Start
120
Disc back-up finished.
No
• If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD,
you can make backup copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 121 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the Jukebox
11
Chapter 11
Using the Jukebox
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s
HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your
CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD
-R/-RW/-ROM, DVD, USB device or PC. Once on the
HDD, you can name albums and tracks, assign them a
genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to play to Jump.
Copying files via USB
Connecting a regular USB device
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB
device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD.
1
Copying music to the HDD
The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD
audio, WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. All
tracks are copied from each CD/DVD as an album.1
WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with
the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but
you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on
page 124).
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order
they appear on the CD/DVD.
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot
be copied to a recordable DVD disc.
Important
• While copying, no other recorder operation is
possible.
• When copying, scheduled timer recordings will not
start until copying is complete.
• Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.
1
2
Load the CD/DVD you want to copy to the HDD.
HOME MENU
2
Connect the USB device.
HOME MENU
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Listen to Music from USB Device’.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Copy Album’ from the command
menu panel.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to
the HDD.
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be
copied/displayed.
Connect PC
Using a USB connection, you can copy WMA and MP3
files from a PC to the HDD of this device. Operations
carried out on the PC require Windows Media Player 10.
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
Important
ENTER
3
Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’.
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD or all
WMA/MP3 files on the DVD are copied to the HDD.
• You can also start copying by starting playback of the
CD/DVD and then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY.
• To cancel copying press ENTER.
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play.
• If the PC you are using does not currently have
Windows Media Player 10 installed, you must first
install the program and make sure it functions
correctly before connecting the USB cable and
attempting to use the Connect PC function.
• For more information on Connect PC, see Using a PC
on page 55.
• You cannot edit or delete albums from this device
when it is connected to a PC via USB. If you wish to
edit or delete albums via the Jukebox, you must first
disconnect the USB cable.
Note
1 • Up to 999 albums can be created in the Jukebox. If you copy via Connect PC, the total number of albums you are able to create may be less
than 999 (for more information, see page 123).
• Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source.
• When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a
brief pause in sound between tracks.
121
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 122 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the Jukebox
11
1 Connect the PC via USB cable.
The screen below is displayed. Choose ‘Take no action’
and click ‘OK’.
*Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player
10, the screen shown below may not be displayed.
6 Open Windows Media Player 10 on the PC.
The device settings screen appears. Click ‘Cancel’.
*Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player
10, the screen shown below may not be displayed.
'Take no action'
'Cancel'
From the PC, in Windows Media Player 10:
'OK'
2
HOME MENU
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Connect PC’.
1. Click ‘Library’.
2. Choose the artist, album or song you would
like to copy, and press the right mouse button.
3. Click ‘Add to Sync list’ (when choosing songs,
click ‘Add to’ then ‘Sync list’).
4. Click ‘Start Sync’.
This begins the synchronization process. When finished,
the message ‘Synchronized to Device’ is displayed in
Windows Media Player 10.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the
device.
If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import
screen is automatically closed. To reopen it, you will have
to repeat steps 2 through 4.
Status
Number of copied
folders
Number of files
unable to be copied
Connect PC
'Start Sync'
Standby
000 Folders
000000 Files
( 000 error )
( 000 error )
Exit
Number of copied files
122
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 123 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the Jukebox
11
• Album and track names that do not conform to the
ISO8859-1 standard may display differently in
Windows Media Player 10 and the Jukebox.
For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows
Media Player 10.
Progress Bar
• When albums are deleted in the Jukebox, their file
hierarchy as displayed in Windows Media Player may
change.
Connect PC
Copying
001 Folders
000003 Files
• File whose extensions are not supported by the
Jukebox (i.e. files that are not .mp3 or .wma) cannot
be transferred.
( 000 error )
( 000 error )
• Files imported to this recorder via Connect PC cannot
be exported from this recorder.
Exit
• To cancel the synchronization process while it is
underway, press ENTER on the remote control. The
Connect PC screen is closed.
• If synchronization fails, make sure that the Pioneer.
HDD/DVD-Recorder device is selected at the
synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 10,
and try again.
7 When you have finished copying files, close
Windows Media Player 10 on the PC.
• Note that no recording functions, including timer
recordings, will be carried out when you are using the
Connect PC function.
Playing music from the Jukebox
You can select albums or individual tracks from the
Jukebox to play.
1
8
HOME MENU
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
Close the import screen on this device.
• If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after
copying, the import screen is automatically closed.
Note
• When using the sync function of Windows Media
Player 10, music, artist and album folders are created
as follows:
Root
Music
Artist 1
Album 1
music1.mp3
music2.mp3
Album 2
music1.wma
Album 1
music1.mp3
ENTER
2
Select a Jukebox option.
• Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs or WMA/MP3
files that have been copied to the HDD.
You can also access this option directly by pressing
JUKEBOX.
• Listen to Music from USB device – Listen to music
from an external USB device.
ENTER
3
Select what you want to play.
The screen below shows albums stored on the HDD:
Album name
Jukebox
Artist 2
By number
• Folders containing no files are not displayed in the
Jukebox (such as the above ‘Artist1’ and ‘Artist2’
folders), but do count toward the maximum of 999
folders allowed in Jukebox.
• Up to 999 tracks can be included in one album. Note
that when there are many tracks contained in one
album, it may take time to display and transfer these
tracks.
• Albums and tracks with no set name that are
transferred from CD/DVD/USB are displayed as
‘UnknownAlbum’ and ‘UnknownFile’ in Windows
Media Player 10.
All Genres
HDD
Remain
47.0 G
10Albums
3
Album1
4
Album2
5
Album3
6
ALL
Play
1
Erase
2
Album4
Edit
3
Album5
4
Play Mode
7
8
Album6
5
9
Album7
10
Album8
6
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
classical
Total 12
70 MB
Info for selected album
Genre Name
7
3-10
0.03.58
Playback status
• If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are
not set to Jump will play.
123
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 124 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Using the Jukebox
11
• If you want to start playback from a selected track in
an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press to enter the track list then select a track to play.
• Genre
Jukebox
Best
Jukebox
By number
All Genres
10Albums
3
Album1
4
Album2
5
Album3
6
Album4
3 Mercury
7
Album5
4 Jupiter
8
Album6
5 Saturn
9
Album7
10
Album8
1 Mars
Erase
2 Venus
Edit
6 Uranus
MP3
Remain
47.0 G
8 MB
Album3
ALL
Erase
2
Edit
Play Mode
3
Pop
Genres
All All
Genres
7
Album5
4
Jazz
8
Classical
Album6
5
9
Album7
10
Album8
HDD
Play
1
Album4
Remain
47.0 G
7 Neptune
Jupiter
HDD
Album2
6
Play Mode
Genre Name
Album1
Genre Rock
Play
ALL
10Albums
3
Sort order
4
All Genres
number
By By
number
No Category
5
Track name
6
Genre Name
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
classical
Total 12
70 MB
3-10
0.03.58
All Genres – All albums are displayed.
classical
3-10
0.03.58
Genre – Only albums in the selected genre are
displayed.
• Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page.
Editing Jukebox albums
Changing the album view
A number of commands are available for editing and
changing the playback behavior of albums.
JUKEBOX
1
From the album list, display the view
options menu panel.
1
Press to display the Jukebox screen.
ENTER
2
ENTER
2
Select what you want to edit.
Select a view option.
ENTER
Jukebox
10Albums
3
Sort order
4
By number
number
ByBynumber
By favourite
5
By album
6
Genre
Genres
All All
Genres
Cancel
HDD
Remain
47.0 G
Album1
Album2
ALL
Play
1
Erase
2
Album4
Edit
3
Album5
4
Play Mode
7
8
Album6
5
9
Album7
10
Album8
Album3
6
Genre Name
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
classical
Total 12
70 MB
3-10
0.03.58
• Sort order
By number – Albums are listed by the album
number.
By favourite – Most often listened to music appears
at the top of the list.
By album – Albums are listed alphabetically.
Note
1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.
124
En
Select an edit function from the command
3
menu panel.
• Erase – Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an
album are selected, the whole album is erased).
• Edit > Album name – Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the album. See Title Name on page 107
for how to enter names.
• Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the track. See Title Name on page 107
for how to enter names.
• Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the genre for the
album.
• Edit > Jump Set1 – Set a track to jump so that it
doesn’t play (choose this command again to cancel
the Jump setting).
• Play Mode – Change the playback order for albums
and tracks.
• Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters
for a genre. See Title Name on page 107 for how to
enter names.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 125 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The PhotoViewer
12
Chapter 12
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and
picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/
-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped digital camera.1 You
can also import files and save them to the recorder’s
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.
Information column, you can change thumbnails via the
/ buttons.
Currently selected
folder in folder list
PhotoViewer HDD
Select Folder
Locating JPEG picture files
Folder
HOME MENU Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the Home
1
Menu.
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
004
Folder4
005
Folder5
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
HDD
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
Remain
100.0 G
ENTER
FOLDER
MENU
2
Select the location of the files you want
to view or edit.
Folder information
1/3
Pages in
folder list
View/Edit Photos on the HDD
View Photos on a CD/DVD
View Photos on a USB Device
4
edit.
Select the file you want to view, copy or
Copy Files from a Digital Camera
• View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View or edit photos
already stored on the recorder’s HDD.
• View Photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a
Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.
• View Photos on a USB Device – View photos on a
digital camera (or other USB device) connected to
the USB port.
• Copy Files from a Digital Camera – Copy all DCF
files directly from a connected digital camera to a
recordable DVD-R/-RW.
Currently selected
thumbnail
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Folder Size 999 MB
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
FILE
MENU
1/84
Pages in
file list
ENTER
3
Select the folder containing the files you
want to view, copy or edit.
The first image from the selected folder is displayed as
thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. From the Folder
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder
to load the file.
• You can change folders via the / buttons.
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created
disc compatibility on page 46).
• The thumbnail of files that cannot be played is
displayed as the
logo.
Note
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible
to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 127).
125
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 126 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The PhotoViewer
12
Changing the display style of the
PhotoViewer
You can choose to display photos by grouping them by
folder, file, or number of thumbnails.
1
Playing a slideshow
ENTER
1
Select a folder from the folder list.
To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to
step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing .
Display the View Options panel.
The View Options panel
2
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
Display Mode
File
File
Style
12 Files
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
ENTER
FILE
MENU
1/84
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or ‘Start Audio
Slideshow’ from the menu.
When you select ‘Start Audio Slideshow’, you are
prompted to select the Genre of music you would like to
hear, and when you press ENTER, music of that Genre
stored on the Jukebox will be played during the
slideshow.
For more information on adding music to the HDD, see
Using the Jukebox on page 121.
2
Choose ‘Display Mode’ or ‘Style’ then
press ENTER to see the available view options.
• Display Mode – Choose between folder and file
display modes.
• You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY
to start playing the slideshow.
• Use PREV/ NEXT to display the previous/
next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow.
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and
right.
• Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12
thumbnails.
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.
This is normal.
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.
The display mode will change to that which you have
chosen.
STOP
4
5
126
En
Select a thumbnail.
• Use PREV and NEXT to display the
previous/next page of thumbnails.
Press to return to the thumbnail.
• You can also use the RETURN/EXIT button.
HOME MENU
Press to exit the PhotoViewer.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 127 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The PhotoViewer
12
Zooming an image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1 ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the
picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2
Use to move the zoomed area.
Importing files to the HDD
You can import files and save them to the HDD2 from a
CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the HDD
you can edit and organize your pictures and print them
out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer.
ENTER
1
Select the location of folders/files you
want to import.
To import a whole folder, select the desired folder, press
, and skip to step 3 below.
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128.
Rotating an image
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
2
ANGLE
• MAIN SUB +
Press during the slideshow to rotate
the displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in
increments of 90º.
Select a file to import, then press .
• To import multiple files, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer CD/DVD
Reloading files from a disc or USB
device
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
1
Navigate to the last entry in the folder
list (‘Read next: ...’).
2 ENTER Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99
folders from the disc or connected USB device.
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in
the images.1
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Copy all to HDD
Copy to HDD
Print
Detailed Information FILE
MENU
Multi-Mode
1/84
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the
folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel.
• The files will be copied to the HDD with the same
folder structure as the original.
• Importing to the HDD will not work if there is
insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already
the maximum number of files and/or folders on the
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will
resume reloading.)
2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.
127
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 128 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The PhotoViewer
12
Selecting multiple files or folders
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files
at once for importing or editing.
Using this feature you can copy all the files1 (including
audio and movie files) stored on a connected USB
camera to a recordable DVD disc.
ENTER
1
Select the folder containing the files you
want to import.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a
Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on
other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible
with JPEG file playback.
Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatically
finalized.
2
Display the command menu.
Important
ENTER
3
• Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that has already
been initialized for Video mode recording but has
nothing yet recorded on it. Discs that have already
been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot
be used.
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer HDD
Select Folder
Folder
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
New Folder
004
Folder4
Folder Options
005
Folder5
Copy to DVD
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
HDD
Start Slideshow
FOLDER
MENU
Multi-Mode
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
Remain
100.0 G
• After backing up the pictures in your digital camera
to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been
recorded properly before deleting anything from the
camera.
Start Audio Slideshow
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to
display the PhotoViewer screen.
1/3
2 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
ENTER
4
Select files/folders from the list.
An orange check mark box() is shown by the item you
selected. A blue check mark box () appears on the folder
select screen when files from that folder are selected.
PhotoViewer HDD
3 Select ‘Copy Files from a Digital Camera’ from the
menu.
View/Edit Photos on the HDD
View Photos on a CD/DVD
Multi-Mode
Select Folder
Folder
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
5
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
004
Folder4
005
Folder5
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
View Photos on a USB Device
Copy Files from a Digital Camera
FOLDER
MENU
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
1/3
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set
to start will not begin, and no other operations are
possible.
Display the command menu.
ENTER
6
Select the command you want to apply
to all the selected items.
Note
1 • There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data that you can copy at one time.
• Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW.
128
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 129 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The PhotoViewer
12
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW
Editing files on the HDD
This feature allows you just to copy some of the files
stored on HDD to a DVD.
There are a number of commands you can use to edit and
organize your pictures stored on the HDD.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a
Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on
other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible
with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need
to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD
player (copying selected files doesn’t automatically
finalize the disc).
Creating a new folder
1
From the folder list, display the menu.
ENTER
Important
• A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded.
• One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files. If there
are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple
slideshows are created on the disc.
2
Select ‘New Folder’.
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the
name F_number.
PhotoViewer HDD
Select Folder
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the
slideshow will become unplayable but the free space
will not increase.
Folder
1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
ENTER
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on the HDD’
from the menu.
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
New Folder
004
Folder4
Folder Options
005
Folder5
Copy to DVD
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
Start Slideshow
Start Audio Slideshow
FOLDER
MENU
Multi-Mode
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
1/3
• There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD.
Erasing a file or folder
ENTER
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128.
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
erase.
• To erase multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode;
see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128.
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it.
Please be careful!
ENTER
4
001
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the menu.
• You can’t erase files that have been locked.
• Folders containing locked files can’t be erased.
Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
• Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR. File
names will be PHOT number.
• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set
to start will not begin, and no other operation is
possible.
2
Display the command menu.
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can press ENTER to
cancel.
129
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 130 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The PhotoViewer
12
ENTER
ENTER
3
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
4
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder Contents’.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder Size 999 MB
Folder2
Start Slideshow
Start Audio Slideshow
File
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
FILE
MENU
12 Files
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
1/84
ENTER
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Folder Size 999 MB
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
ENTER
4
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.
5
file(s) to.
Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
ENTER
6
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there is
insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the
maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD.
Naming files and folders
1/84
1 Select the file or folder you want to rename.
You can’t rename files that have been locked.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
• You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR
when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to
confirm.
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
3
Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’.
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
Copying files
File
12 Files
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
• To copy multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode;
see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128.
2
Display the command menu.
ENTER
3
130
En
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
4 Enter a new name for the file/folder.
File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters
long.
See Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 107
for how to enter a name.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 131 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The PhotoViewer
12
Locking/Unlocking files
Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure
and prevent them from being renamed.
Use the same process to both lock and unlock files.
Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a
padlock icon.
Printing files
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB
port will enable you to print out picture files1 stored on
the HDD, a CD/DVD, or directly from a digital camera.
Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you
are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder
before starting.
1
Select the file(s) you want to lock (or
unlock).
• To lock/unlock multiple files or folders, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on
page 128.
1
2
Display the command menu.
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
3
ENTER
Select the file(s) you want to print.
• To print multiple files, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 128.
Display the command menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer HDD
ENTER
4
Folder2
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’.
File
PhotoViewer HDD
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
12 Files
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Start Audio Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
FILE
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
1/84
ENTER
1/84
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them.
To remove all locks within a given folder, choose ‘Folder
Option’ > ‘Unlock Folder Contents’ .
To view detailed information
This feature allows you to check the settings of the
camera from which you imported the photos.
1 Choose the file for which you would like to see
detailed information.
4
Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or ‘Cancel’ to
cancel.
• Once printing has started, you can cancel by
pressing ENTER.
Tip
• Paper size and layout can be set; the options
available depend on your printer — check the printer
manual for details.
• This recorder may not work correctly with all printers.
2 Choose ‘Detailed Information’.
When no detailed information is available, nothing is
displayed.
Note
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.
131
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 132 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Disc Setup menu
13
Chapter 13
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu.
Important
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
HOME MENU
Basic settings
ENTER
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’ then ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
2
Input Disc Name
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name
function to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
HOME MENU
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
On
Initialize
Lock Disc
Off
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Optimize HDD
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc
to make edits, select Off.
DVD-RW Auto Initialize
ENTER
2
Screen’.
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc Name’ > ‘Next
DVD-RW
• Default setting: VR Mode
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
Initialize
Lock Disc
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Next Screen
Optimize HDD
Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you
insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired
initialization mode before inserting a disc.
See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 90 for detailed
instructions.
Initialize settings
ENTER
3
Input a name for the disc.
The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR
mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.
• See Title Name on page 107 for more on navigating
the input screen.
Lock Disc
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
• Default setting: Off
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either
VR mode or Video mode recording.
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be
automatically initialized for recording according to the
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see
page 90).
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize
them for VR mode recording.1
Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording,
editing or erasing of the disc.
Note
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode,
the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.
132
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 133 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Disc Setup menu
13
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as
a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD
-RAM disc, select VR mode.
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 89 for
detailed instructions.
Important
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.
During optimization, playback and recording are not
possible.
• Cancelling optimization mid-way does not undo the
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly
optimized.
Finalize settings
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
HOME MENU
Finalize
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW
ENTER
2
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then ‘Start’.
Disc Setup
Optimize HDD
Basic
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only
necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu
for the disc.
Start
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on
page 88 for detailed instructions.
Undo Finalize
DVD-RW
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
1
HOME MENU
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. If no
actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the
optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself
off.
Initialize HDD
HDD
When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a
problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the
problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the
data on it.
1
HOME MENU
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
‘Start’.
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then
ENTER
2
Optimize HDD
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then ‘Start’.
Disc Setup
Basic
HDD
Initialize HDD
Start
Initialize
Finalize
Initialize HDD
Optimize
HDD
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will
automatically display a message recommending
optimization.
133
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 134 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Video Adjust menu
14
Chapter 14
The Video Adjust menu
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture
quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner1 and for each external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Pr 1
Memory1
Detailed Settings
Choosing a preset
HOME MENU With the recorder stopped, press to
1
display the Home Menu.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
Memory1
ENTER
2
ENTER
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
Prog. Motion
Pr 1
Motion
PureCinma
3-D Y/C
ENTER
3
Select a preset.
Pr 1
Tuner
Still
Auto
Motion
Still
YNR
Off
Max
CNR
Off
Max
Detail
Off
White AGC
Max
Off
Detailed Settings
• Use the VIDEO IN button to switch between the builtin TV tuner and the external inputs.
• Use the Smart Jog to change the channel of the
built-in TV tuner.
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually set to Auto; but try switching to
Off if the picture appears unnatural.
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation.
• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and
Laserdiscs
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
There are six presets available:
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP).
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level
adjustment.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
Note
1 When the Component Video Out (see page 139) is set to Interlace, the settings for the digital tuner cannot be changed.
134
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 135 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Video Adjust menu
14
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (525 Input Line System only).
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear.
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
Choosing a preset
ENTER
4
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
Adjust the currently selected setting.
HOME MENU Press to exit.
5
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
HOME MENU With a disc playing (or paused), press to
1
display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
ENTER
3
Select a setting.
TV
Detailed Settings
There are six presets available:
• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs
• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional).
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
Memory1
Detailed Settings
135
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 136 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
14
The Video Adjust menu
3 Select the picture quality setting you want to
adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
Motion
PureCinma
Still
Auto1
YNR
Off
BNR
Off
Max
Max
MNR
Off
Max
Sharpness
Soft
Fine
Detail
Soft
Fine
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog.
Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.)
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching
to Auto 2, On or Off if the picture appears unnatural.
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of
flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).
• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible
around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG
compression).
• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of the highfrequency (detailed) elements in the picture.
Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. White
Level is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. Black
Level is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level. Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of
darker images. Gamma Correction is ineffective for
HDMI output.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green. Hue is ineffective for HDMI output.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear. Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output.
4 Use the / buttons to adjust the currently
selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
136
En
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 137 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Initial Setup menu
15
Chapter 15
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting
Options
Explanation
Auto
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set
automatically.
Manual •
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set
the time and date manually.
Basic
Clock Setting
• If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set.
• The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System
525 System
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.
625 System •
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
• This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input.
• See also About the input line system on page 146 for more information on this setting.
Power Save
HELP Setting
EPG Type Select
Setup Navigator
Mode 1
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna
output when the recorder is in standby.
Mode 2
No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in
standby.
Off •
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and
antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.
On •
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
Off
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on
the remote to manually display the Help screen.)
GUIDE Plus+
Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG.
Digital EPG
Use the EPG based on information provided by D.TV broadcasts.
Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting up on
page 56.
Next Screen
Scans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the
results. Before the scan starts you will need to select your country.
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels
were found, and if so, how many.
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or
RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no channels are set.)
Digital Tuner
Replace Channels
If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased.
137
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 138 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Add New Channels
Next Screen
Automatically scans for new digital channels.
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels
were found, and if so, how many.
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or
RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no new channels are set.)
Channel Sort
Next Screen
Use this screen to sort channel presets into your prefered order. Use the
/// buttons to highlight the channel you want to move, press
ENTER. Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to
move the channel preset to, then press ENTER again.
(If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen, you can select
the next/previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks and
pressing ENTER.)
Channel Options
Next Screen
From this screen you can skip or lock channels. Locked channels will require
the correct password to be entered before the channel can be watched. Use
the /// buttons to highlight a preference box and press ENTER to
toggle the preference.
To enter this screen, input the parental lock password when prompted (if one
has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental lock
password).
Auto Skip
Off •
No channels are automatically skipped.
Radio
Radio channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Data
Data channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Radio & Data
Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Signal Check
Next Screen
Use this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels. Use
the / buttons to change the RF channel; select Add New Channels
then press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME MENU to exit.
Aerial Power
On
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) when this recorder is on
or in standby.
Auto
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) only when this recorder
is on.
Off •
This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial (antenna).
• If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto, the aerial may not be connected properly, or it may be shorted. In either
case, check the connection and try making the setting again.
D.TV Language
138
En
Next Screen
From this screen you can set your Primary and Secondary Audio preference
for multilingual digital broadcasts, your Primary and Secondary Subtitle
preference for programmes that are broadcast with subtitles, and your
Teletext language preference. Use the / buttons to highlight a field then
use the / buttons to change it.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 139 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
15
Explanation
Analog Tuner
Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels
in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen
appears showing which channels have been assigned to which programme
numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting
option below.
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.
Download from TV If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your
TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the
download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel
mapping screen appears, as above.
See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more
information.
Manual CH Setting
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by
auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel
setting screen:
• Change channel presets using the Smart Jog.
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that
channel), change the Skip setting to On.
• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country
or region.
• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current
channel preset.
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then
adjust the Level setting.
• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region.
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the
current channel preset.
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder
connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On.
Channel Swapping
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets
so that you can group together presets that naturally go together. Select two
presets to swap then press ENTER.
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external
input and the built-in TV tuner. Use the Smart Jog or VIDEO IN buttons to
change the preset or external input. On the default Auto setting the recorder
can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58
NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the
picture is displayed incorrectly.
Video In/Out
Input Colour System
• Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode.
• See also About the input colour system on page 146 for more information on this setting.
Component Video
Out
Interlace •
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video.
Progressive
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the
operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.
• For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see page 140) must be set to something other than RGB.
• If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case,
press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on
page 144 to the default setting).
• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
139
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 140 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
AV1 Out
Video •
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video
(compatible with all TVs).
S-Video
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you are
using a long SCART cable.
RGB
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your
TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner
and from external inputs is not output when the recorder is in TV mode.
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect
using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 161).
• The Component Video Out setting (see page 139) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB.
• When the HDMI signal is output, the AV1 Out outputs the composite video signal even when it is set to RGB.
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Video •
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite
video.
S-Video
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-video.
RGB
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB.
Decoder
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel
Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting on page 139.)
On •
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
Off
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with
your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 146 for related information.
Audio In
NICAM Select
Analog Tuner Level
External Audio
NICAM •
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular Audio
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch
the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.)
Normal •
Standard setting.
Compression
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion.
Stereo •
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard
stereo.
Bilingual
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Bilingual Recording
A/L •
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD
with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW or in LPCM mode, from an external source.
B/R
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except
in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.
DV Input
140
En
Stereo 1 •
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a
camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports
two stereo audio tracks.
Mix
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 141 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
15
Explanation
Audio Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
Dolby Digital •
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played.
Dolby Digital PCM
Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.
On •
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.
Off
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when
your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the
analog audio outputs.
96 kHz PCM Out
96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHz
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.
MPEG Out
MPEG
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being
played.
MPEG PCM •
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your
connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.
On
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to
Dolby Digital material at low volume.
Off •
Switches off Audio DRC.
Audio DRC
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the
dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer — see Dynamic Range Control on page 32.
Language
OSD Language
English •
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.
On Screen Display and D.TV Language will both reflect this setting.
Audio Language
English •
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for
DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 147.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.
Subtitle Language
English •
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for
DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 147.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.
141
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 142 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Auto Language
On •
On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will
play using that language, without subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have
a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with
subtitles.
Off
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle
language preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.
DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle
Language •
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the
subtitle language.
English
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languages
Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD
-Video menus.
Other
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 147.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle Display
On •
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language
and Auto Language preferences.
Off
Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist Subtitle
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
Recording
Manual Recording
On (go to setup)
All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32, LPCM and XP+
modes can be set.
Off •
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 151 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec
On
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on
to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the
recording will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the
recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected.
Off •
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the
recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.
Subtitle Recording
Set Thumbnail
Auto Chapter
(HDD/VR)
142
En
On
The selected subtitle language is recorded with the D.TV timer recording.
Off •
No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings.
0 seconds •
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of
the title.
30 seconds
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.
3 minutes
Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title.
On •
When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD, chapter marks are
added at the black screen between commercials and main programming.
When recording in DV, chapter marks can be changed by date/time.
Off
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 143 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation
15
Explanation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10
minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.
Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)
HDD Recording
Format
No Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in DVD+R/+RW or in real-time copying, chapter markers are
inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
Video Mode Off
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you
don’t need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW.
Video Mode On •
Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings.
This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/
-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy can be used.
• When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode
Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 140.
• When the recording mode is set to XP+, you cannot change HDD Recording Format.
Playback
TV Screen Size
4:3 (Letter Box)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format
presentation for widescreen material.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan
presentation for widescreen material.
16:9 •
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3
material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override
this setting.
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Field
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Frame
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Auto •
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image.
On
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit
points.
Off •
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a
VR mode Play List.
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.
Angle Indicator
On •
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video
disc.
Off
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.
Set Password /
Change Password
Next Screen
If no password has yet been set, enter a four digit number to become your
password. If you want to change the password, first enter your old password,
then enter a new one.
DVD Playback
Next Screen
From this screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level
for playback of DVDs with parental level coding.
Parental Lock
143
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 144 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
D.TV Age Limit
Next Screen
Use this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV programmes. Programmes
that are broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set
here will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can
be viewed.
You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting.
This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden.
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)
Screen Resolution
1920 x 1080p
Constant 1920 x 1080p output.
1920 x 1080i
Constant 1920 x 1080i output.
1280 x 720p
Constant 1280 x 720p output.
720 x 576p
(720 x 480p)
Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input Line System to
525 System, video is output in 720 x 480p).
720 x 576i
(720 x 480i)
Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input Line System to
525 System, video is output in 720 x 480i).
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while
holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 139 to the default
setting).
• If you have the Colour set to YCbCr 4:2:2, you cannot select 720 x 576i (720 x 480i).
4:3 Video Output
Colour
Full
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio.
Normal
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3
video will be shown with bars on each side.
RGB (0–255)
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the RGB (16–235)
setting.
RGB (16–235)
Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the
RGB (0–255) setting.
YCbCr 4:2:2
The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is
the standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices.
YCbCr 4:4:4
The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal.
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.
• You cannot choose YCbCr 4:2:2 when the Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 576i (720 x 480i).
Audio Output
Auto •
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal.
However, depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels,
and the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output.
PCM
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS).
Bitstream Priority
Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio.
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.
Options
144
En
On Screen Display
On •
The recorder displays operation displays ( Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.
Off
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
Front Panel Display
On •
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby.
Off
The front panel display is switched off in standby.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 145 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Initial Setup menu
15
Setting
Options
Explanation
Remote Control
Mode
Recorder 1–3
(default: Recorder 1)
If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to
different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote
controller ID, press and hold RETURN/EXIT then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The
remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.
AV. Link
This Recorder Only • Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are
not passed through to the AV output.
Pass Through
Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for
connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is
not passed through.)
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 137) to Off.
DivX VOD
Registration Code
Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX video
compatibility and DivX® VOD content on page 46.
Set Preview
(HDD only)
Quick Preview •
When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from
throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally
from the beginning.)
Normal
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title.
CI Information
Next Screen
This option displays a menu of CI card functions. Consult your service
provider for more information on the functions available.
Software Update
Next Screen
The Software Update function can check for and download updated system
software for the digital tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on
page 147.
Options 2
USB
Pause Live TV
Restart USB Device If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder, try using this
option to restart it. If the device still does not work properly try switching it off
then back on, and/or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.
Confirm Printer
Use this option to confirm the make and model of the printer connected to
the recorder (does not work with all printers).
TV’s Tuner
Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV
connected by SCART cable.
Recorder’s Tuner • Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s internal TV tuner.
See also Pause Live TV on page 84 for more information on this setting.
HDD Sleep Mode
Proceed
Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows
you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound
quality. When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load.
The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions,
including:
• Turning the power off and on again.
• Pressing the HDD/DVD button and choosing the HDD.
• When a timer recording begins.
• When you try and make any changes to system settings.
145
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 146 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
15
The Initial Setup menu
Additional information about the TV system
settings
About the input line system
This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC
and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input
Colour System settings determine how the recorder
treats incoming video signals from an external input.
Please note the following points when changing the
input line system:
• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel
preset, changing the input line system will usually
also affect the input line system of the
AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if the
AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder, then the L2
input is affected instead.
• If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the
screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your
TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the
front panel (Stop) button then pressing
INPUT SELECT (also front panel) while the recorder is
stopped.
• When you switch the Input Line System setting the
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
(Stop) button and INPUT SELECT buttons as
described above, there is no confirmation, so please
use with care.
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems
on the same disc.
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour
System setting also changes (see below).
About NTSC on PAL TV
Depending on the Input Line System setting and the
NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when
the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table
below.
Input Line System NTSC on PAL TV
Output when
stopped
625 System
PAL
525 System
Off
On
PAL
Off
NTSC
On
PAL–60
About the input colour system
The available options of the Input Colour System setting
depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below
shows the different options available.
Input Line System
Built-in analog
tuner
External input
625 System
Auto
Auto
525 System
PAL
PAL
SECAM
SECAM
n/a
Auto
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
Additional information about component
video output
If you switch the Component Video Out setting to
Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with
progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see
anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and
hold the (Stop) button on the front panel, then press
OPEN/CLOSE. This will set the recorder’s video output
back to Interlace.
146
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 147 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
The Initial Setup menu
15
Selecting other languages for
language options
ENTER
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
Using Software Update (Digital tuner)
The Software Update function can keep the built-in
digital tuner up to date with the latest system software.
You can either check for updates manually, or have the
recorder do it automatically at regular intervals.
Access the Software Update screen from the Options
menu.
There are three options available: Manual Update, Auto
Update and Technical Information.
ENTER
2
Select the language you want.
Initial Setup
DVD Menu Language
Basic
OSD
Digital Tuner
Audio Language
Language
Subtitle Language
Number
Auto Language
Analogue Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Language
Audio Out
English
0
5
1
4
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Language
Recording
• Select by language name: Use the / buttons to
change the language.
• Select by code number: Press then use the number
buttons to enter the four-digit language code.
See Language code list on page 158 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
Manual Update
Select Manual Update to check for updated software
immediately. If new software is found then it is
automatically downloaded and installed. The new
software will take effect the next time the recorder is
powered on.
If for some reason the new software could not be
downloaded successfully, a dialog box informs you of the
error. Press HOME MENU to exit or RETURN/EXIT to
return to the previous screen.
Note that channel information may be erased when
software update is used, and that timer recording will not
work during the update.
To cancel manual update before it has completed, press
HOME MENU.
Auto Update
By default, the Auto Update option is On, which means
that periodically the recorder will check for and update
the digital tuner software if it’s available. We recommend
that you leave this option On.
If new software is found and successfully downloaded,
the recorder automatically scans for new digital
channels, informing you if any are found (this is the
equivalent of using the Add New Channel option, found
in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu).
Technical Information
This displays the current hardware and software version
numbers of the digital tuner.
147
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 148 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
16
Chapter 16
Additional information
Using the TV remote control buttons
Setting up the remote to control your TV
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table on the following
page.
1
Switch on your TV.
2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then
enter the maker code for your TV.
See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes.
If there is more than one code given for your make, input
the first one in the list.
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table, you will not be able to use this remote to
control your TV.
3 Point the remote towards your TV and press
TV to check that the remote works with your TV.
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off.
If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.
148
En
The table below shows how to use this remote control
with your TV.
Button
What it does
TV
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
INPUT
Press to change the TV’s video input
VOLUME +/–
Use to adjust the TV volume
CHANNEL +/–
Use to change TV channels
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 149 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
16
TV Preset code list
Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the
codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using.
Manufacturer Code(s)
Manufacturer Code(s)
Manufacturer Code(s)
ACURA 644
ADMIRAL 631
AIWA 660
AKAI 632, 635, 642
AKURA 641
ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644
AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647
ANITECH 644
ASA 645
ASUKA 641
AUDIOGONIC 607, 636
BASIC LINE 641, 644
BAUR 631, 607, 642
BEKO 638
BEON 607
BLAUPUNKT 631
BLUE SKY 641
BLUE STAR 618
BPL 618
BRANDT 636
BTC 641
BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656
CASCADE 644
CATHAY 607
CENTURION 607
CGB 642
CIMLINE 644
CLARIVOX 607
CLATRONIC 638
CONDOR 638
CONTEC 644
CROSLEY 632
CROWN 638, 644
CRYSTAL 642
CYBERTRON 641
FORMENTI 632, 607, 642
FRONTECH 631, 642, 646
FRONTECH/PROTECH 632
FUJITSU 648, 629
FUNAI 640, 646, 658
GBC 632, 642
GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618
GEC 607, 634, 648
GELOSO 632, 644
GENEXXA 631, 641
GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650
GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656
GORENJE 638
GPM 641
GRAETZ 631, 642
GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648
GRADIENTE 630
GRANDIN 618
GRUNDIG 631, 653
HANSEATIC 607, 642
HCM 618, 644
HINARI 607, 641, 644
HISAWA 618
HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643,
654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618
HUANYU 656
HYPSON 607, 618, 646
ICE 646, 647
IMPERIAL 638, 642
INDIANA 607
INGELEN 631
INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642
INTERVISION 646, 649
ISUKAI 641
ITC 642
ITT 631, 632, 642
JEC 605
JVC 613, 623
MAGNAFON 649
MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629
MANESTH 639, 646
MARANTZ 607
MARK 607
MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644,
647, 648
MCMICHAEL 634
MEDIATOR 607
MEMOREX 644
METZ 631
MINERVA 631, 653
MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631
MULTITECH 644, 649
NEC 659
NECKERMANN 631, 607
NEI 607, 642
NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648
NOBLIKO 649
NOKIA 632, 642, 652
NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652
OCEANIC 631, 632, 642
ORION 632, 607, 639, 640
OSAKI 641, 646, 648
OSO 641
OSUME 648
OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642
PALLADIUM 638
PANAMA 646
PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622
PATHO CINEMA 642
PAUSA 644
PHILCO 632, 642
PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656, 668
PHOENIX 632
PHONOLA 607
PROFEX 642, 644
PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649
DAEWOO 607, 644, 656
DAINICHI 641
DANSAI 607
DAYTON 644
DECCA 607, 648
DIXI 607, 644
DUMONT 653
KAISUI 618, 641, 644
KAPSCH 631
KENDO 642
KENNEDY 632, 642
ELIN 607
KORPEL 607
ELITE 641
KOYODA 644
ELTA 644
LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648
EMERSON 642
LIESENK&TTER 607
ERRES 607
LOEWE 607
FERGUSON 607, 636, 651
LUXOR 632, 642, 643
FINLANDIA 635, 643
FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654 M-ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654,
656,
607, 636, 651
FIRSTLINE 640, 644
MAGNADYNE 632, 649
FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645
Manufacturer Code(s)
SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646, 669, 670
SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614
SBR 607, 634
SCHAUB LORENZ 642
SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647
SEG 642, 646
SEI 632, 640, 649
SELECO 631, 642
SHARP 602, 619, 627, 667
SIAREM 632, 649
SIEMENS 631
SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649
SKANTIC 643
SOLAVOX 631
SONOKO 607, 644
SONOLOR 631, 635
SONTEC 607
SONY 604
SOUNDWAVE 607
STANDARD 641, 644
STERN 631
SUSUMU 641
SYSLINE 607
TANDY 631, 641, 648
TASHIKO 634
TATUNG 607, 648
TEC 642
TELEAVIA 636
TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652
TELETECH 644
TENSAI 640, 641
THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663
THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648
TOMASHI 618
TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653
TOWADA 642
ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649
UNIDEN 671
UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645,
QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 646, 654
R-LINE 607
VESTEL 607
RADIOLA 607
VICTOR 613
RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 VOXSON 631
RBM 653
RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, WALTHAM 643
WATSON 607
661, 662, 609
WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649
REDIFFUSION 632, 642
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607
REX 631, 646
YOKO 607, 642, 646
ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646
SABA 631, 636, 642, 651
SAISHO 639, 644, 646
SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643
SAMBERS 649
ZENITH 603, 620
PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642,
651
149
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 150 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
16
Additional information
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. 1 Check with the disc manufacturer for
compatibility.
Rec mode
DVD disc type
SEP
SLP
EP
LP
SP
XP
10 h
8h
6h
4h
2h
1h
DVD-R / 1x
DVD-RW / 1x
1x
6 mins.
7.5 mins.
10 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
60 mins.
DVD-RW / 2x
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM / 2x
2x
3 mins.
4 mins.
5 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
DVD+R / 2.4x
DVD+RW / 2.4x
DVD+R DL
2.4x
*1
*1
*1
6.3 mins.
12.5 mins.
25 mins.
DVD-RAM / 3x
DVD-RAM / 5x
3x
2 mins.
2.5 mins.
3.5 mins.
5 mins.
10 mins.
20 mins.
DVD-R / 4x
DVD-RW / 4x
DVD+R / 4x
DVD+RW / 4x
4x
1.5 mins.*1
2 mins.*1
2.5 mins.*1
4 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
DVD-R / 8x / 16x
DVD+R / 8x / 16x
DVD-RW / 6x
DVD+RW / 8x
6x
1.25 mins.*1
1.6 mins.*1
2.2 mins.*1
3 mins.
5.5 mins.
11 mins.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed).
150
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 151 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
16
Manual recording modes
The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as
well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording time on the HDD, see Specifications (DVR-LX60D) on
page 162.
Rec. time*1
Single-Layer
DVD:
DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-RAM
Level
Resolution*2
Dual-Layer
DVD:
DVD-R DL
DVD+R DL
MN 1 *3,4
802 mins.
1440 mins.
MN 2 *3,4
720 mins.
1292 mins.
MN 3 *3,4
SEP
600 mins.
1077 mins.
MN 4 *4
SLP
480 mins.
861 mins.
420 mins.
754 mins.
EP
360 mins.
646 mins.
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
--- mins.
538 mins.
484 mins.
431 mins.
413 mins.
395 mins.
377 mins.
359 mins.
341 mins.
323 mins.
305 mins.
287 mins.
269 mins.
251 mins.
233 mins.
215 mins.
197 mins.
188 mins.
179 mins.
170 mins.
161 mins.
153 mins.
144 mins.
135 mins.
126 mins.
117 mins.
111 mins.
111 mins.
--- mins.
MN 5
*4
MN 6 *4
MN 7
MN 8
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
LP
SP
XP
*5
XP+
Video mode Off (HDD)
VR mode (DVD-R/-RW)
DVD-RAM
VR mode (DVD-R DL)
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode (DVD-R/-RW)
DVD+R/+RW
Video mode (DVD-R DL)
DVD+R DL
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
480 x 480 /
480 x 576
544 x 480 /
544 x 576
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
*1
Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes.
*2
The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
*3
Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.
*4
Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.
*5
XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode.
• Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.
• Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format.
• See also Recording on page 79.
151
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 152 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
16
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
152
En
Problem
Remedy
The disc is automatically
ejected after closing the
disc tray
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 44).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 160).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.
Can’t eject a disc
• Turn off the power to this device and press and hold OPEN/CLOSE on the front of the
recorder for more than three seconds.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 44).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 160).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Press HDD/DVD to select the DVD.
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the
condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System different
to the current recorder setting.
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-once protected recordings
will not play in this recorder.
Can’t record a disc
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 44).
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 89). This
can take up to an hour.
Remote control does not
work
• If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack, point
the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use (page 48).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 145). (When the
batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 20).
• Replace the batteries (page 21).
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 48).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input.
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to interlace by
pressing and holding the front panel (Stop) button then pressing OPEN/CLOSE.
• If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure that Aerial Power in the
Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto (page 138).
• If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the Aerial Power setting
will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial connection and try making the setting again.
• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the
settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 153 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
No sound or sound is
distorted
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play.
Press PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS audio can only be played back if the recorder’s digital output is connected to the
receiver subwoofer. If connected to your TV, your TV must have a DTS decoder for you to be
able to enjoy DTS sound.
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 48).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
Cannot switch a bilingual
programme
• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub
channels are both output.
16
The picture from the
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via
external input is distorted this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
The picture is distorted
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 146). (You can also change it by pressing the
(Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder
stopped.)
Screen is stretched
vertically or horizontally
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 143) is correct for the kind of TV you have
(see also page 159).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal.
When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
Audio/subtitle language
cannot be changed
• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a
digital broadcast.
• You can only use the audio track and subtitles for the language that were selected at the
time of recording a digital broadcast. The audio track and subtitles cannot be changed to
other languages.
Can’t play a disc recorded
using this recorder on
another player
• If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, make sure that it’s
finalized (page 88).
• Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible
in order to play it (page 43).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM compatible
players (page 80).
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other
players. Finalize the disc and try again.
During playback the
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly.
picture is dark or distorted Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Recorded contents are not • Change the recording mode to XP/SP.
clear or artefacts appear in
areas of flat colour (due to
MPEG compression; also
known as block noise)
153
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 154 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
16
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
Can’t record or does not
record successfully
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
• For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:
– HDD: 999 titles
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc)
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 132).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has
already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When
recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what
you want to record (page 146).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer programme doesn’t • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not
record successfully
the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, programmes that are
copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once
material (page 80).
• Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record
completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly unplugging
or after a power failure
the front panel display
shows ‘--:--’
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset
when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps
all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use
the recorder again.
• To have the battery replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or
your dealer to carry out repairs.
Front panel display shows • The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 87).
‘LOCKED’ when a button is
pressed
Can’t use One Touch Copy • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording
and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video
(HDD to DVD)
mode) or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized.
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for recording
and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles
may not decrease.
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a disc menu
on the disc you’re trying to use.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch Copy
will not work.
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch Copy
feature can’t be used.
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD+R/
+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying to
DVD+R/+RW.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch Copy • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles
(DVD to HDD)
on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
154
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 155 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
16
Problem
Remedy
The device connected to
the USB port is not
recognized
• Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 55).
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.
• Check that the USB device is powered on.
• Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on.
• Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu (page 145).
• If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are connected at the same
time, it’s possible that only the first device connected to this recorder will be recognized.
File names are not
displayed properly.
• Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on
this unit.
HDMI
Problem
Remedy
The connected HDMI or
DVI device does not
display any picture (and
the front panel HDMI
indicator does not light)
• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components
is on).
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI
device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder.
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this recorder.
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-standard cable may result in
no picture being output.
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to connect devices
together.
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this recorder.
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p)
and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input.
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output.
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.
No video from the HDMI
output
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at
all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to
switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 139 to the default setting).
There’s no sound from the • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.
• Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came
connected HDMI or DVI
with the connected device).
device
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working
• Press (Stop) then try restarting playback.
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to
switch the power off, then switch back on and restart
playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and
hold STANDBY/ON for five seconds until the
power switches off.
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
A.TV
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
D.TV
PLTV
DivX
USB
COPY
COMMON INTERFACE
STOP REC
CH
INPUT
SELECT
155
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 156 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
16
Additional information
On-screen displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
156
En
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder
automatically initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder
and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management data.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/
chapters or combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the
finalization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even
with a new disc, please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service
center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also
appear if the disc is dirty or damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM
compatible.
• Cannot record this content using Video
mode recording.
• This video cannot be recorded to DVD+R/+RW.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW
disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder
may be damaged — please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized
service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• Repairing disc.
• Repairing the HDD.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the
power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation. Press
DISPLAY to clear message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating
limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can
be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to
maintain playback and recording performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can
be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain
performance.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 157 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
16
Message
Explanation/Action
• The HDD has not been sufficiently
optimized. Please optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is
likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for
optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from the
HDD and optimize again.
• An error occurred. Please consult the service
center. Note that contents on the HDD may be
erased when servicing this unit.
This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot
be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your
nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out
repairs.
• The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect. Use the
Disc Setup menu to reinitialize.
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be
made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 133) may result in your being
able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will
erase all recorded contents, including protected files.
• This signal’s TV system is different from the
recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different
from the TV system settings of this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system
mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear message.
The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set
for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV system
is different than the recording.
During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop
automatically.
• You are not allowed to watch this
Conditional Access Programme.
A CA module or smart card (obtained from your service provider) is
required to watch the selected programme. Insert the supplied
module or card into the Common Interface card slot on the front
panel of the recorder (page 17).
• There is no DV input or the input signal is
unrecordable.
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank
section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.
• No DV camcorder connected.
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is
switched off.
• You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at a time.
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder.
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then turn it back on again.
• Could not operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder.
• The DV camcorder is not set for playback.
Please select playback mode on the DV
camcorder.
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode.
• The printer is not ready or is not connected.
Please check the printer.
This message is displayed when communication could not be
established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting section if you
do not know the cause.
• Printing has been cancelled because ...
This message is displayed when there is a printer error during
printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, either
reconnect the printer and start the printing job again, or select “Yes”
to resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print job). See also the
operating instructions that came with your printer for possible
causes of print errors.
157
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 158 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
16
Additional information
Front-panel displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• E01
The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest
Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• E02
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be
made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 133) may result in your being
able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will
erase all recorded contents, including protected files.
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Greek (el), 0512
Polish (pl), 1612
Czech (cs), 0319
Norwegian (no), 1415
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
158
En
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Korean (ko), 1115
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laotian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 159 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
16
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc
Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars
at the top and bottom of the screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The sides of the programme are cropped so that the
picture fills the whole screen.
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The programme is presented correctly on either setting.
4:3
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc
Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The programme is presented in widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the picture is presented —
check the manual that came with the TV for details.
159
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 160 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
16
Additional information
Damaged discs
Handling discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don’t risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs.
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a
circular motion.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you’re not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
160
En
Cleaning the pickup lens
The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not recommend using
them since some may damage the lens.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for
about an hour before switching on and using.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 161 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
16
Hints on installation
Moving the recorder
We want you to enjoy using this recorder for years to
come, so please bear in mind the following points when
choosing a suitable location for it:
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/
ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the
POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at
least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord.
Never lift or move the recorder during playback or
recording — discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
humidity, including near radiators and other heatgenerating appliances.
Resetting the recorder
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
Place on a window sill or other place where the
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
1
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold
(Stop) and press STANDBY/ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
Make sure that the recorder is on.
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference — especially if the television
uses an indoor antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder
may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth —
this may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
161
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 162 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
16
Additional information
Specifications (DVR-LX60D)
General
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . .220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 W
Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.69 W
(Front panel display: off)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 kg
Dimensions . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 77 mm (H) x 288 mm (D)
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C
Operating humidity . . . . . . .5 % to 85 % (no condensation)
TV system . . . . . . . NTSC (external input only)/PAL/SECAM
Readable discs
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM,
Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG,
CD-DA, DivX)
Recording discs and formats
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode
DVD-RAM: VR mode
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R DL: +VR mode
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5 MHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD (250 GB)
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 36 h to 711 h
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h
162
En
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 3 h 35 m
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 7 h 11 m
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 10 h 46 m
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 14 h 21 m
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 17 h 57 m
(DVD-R DL only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m
Timer
Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Tuner (analog)
Receivable channels
SECAM B/G
PAL B/G
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
Frequency
47 MHz to 89 MHz
Channel
E2 to E4
X to Z
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12
S1 to S20
M1 to M10
U1 to U10
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM L
PAL I
Frequency
44 MHz to 89 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
Channel
A to C
X to Z
D to J
11, 13
S1 to S20
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM D/K
PAL D/K
VHF (low)
Frequency
49 MHz to 65 MHz
Channel
FB, FC1, FC
Frequency
49 MHz to 94 MHz
Channel
R1 to R5
VHF (high)
104 MHz to 300 MHz
F1 to F6
B to Q
104 MHz to 300 MHz
R6 to R12
S1 to S20
Hyper
UHF
300 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz 21 to 69
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Tuner (digital)
Receiving system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DVB-T (2 K/8 K COFDM)
Tuner VHF/UHF . . . . . . VHF band III (174 MHz to 230 MHz)
UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz)
Auto Channel Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 ch, Auto Preset,
Auto Label, Auto Sort
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo MPEG layer I/II
Audio Decoder
. . . . . . . . .Sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
This product’s digital tuner has been confirmed for use in the
following countries: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Spain,
Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 163 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
Additional information
Input/Output
Antenna
. . . . . . . . .75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (analog)
. . . . . . . . . 75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital)
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),
Input 3 (rear)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2, Input 3)
Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1),
RCA jack (Output)
S-Video input . . AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear)
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, Input 3)
S-Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
Y (luminance) - Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output)
Component video output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jacks
RGB input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1)
RGB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1)
Audio input
. . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear) L/R
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA module
DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front)
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin
16
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no.
AV1 (RGB)-TV / AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in
19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out
20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .– / Video in or Y in
8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
Supplied accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/R6 dry cell batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G-LINK™ cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject
to change without notice, due to improvement.
This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced
by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC Corporation.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission
from Microsoft Corporation.
163
En
DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 164 ページ 2007年4月24日 火曜日 午後7時58分
http://www.pioneer.co.uk
http://www.pioneer.eu
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
<ARB7383-A>
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising